M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP

UID No. AECPL/EIA/PAN-5(f)/2020/02

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION IN EXISTING PRODUCTION CAPACITY AND ADDITION OF NEW PRODUCTS WITHIN

OUR EXISTING PREMISES

[Project/Activity No.-5(f), Cat.-‘B’] (Project falls under Critically Polluted Area (CPA) –applied under Cat.-“A”)

M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP

Plot No. 84, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 & 102, Phase – II, GIDC Vatva, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat

Prepared By

Anand Environmental Consultants (P) Ltd. (QCI / NABET Accredited and NABL Accredited)

16, Everest Tower, Naranpura, Ahmedabad-380013,Gujarat Phone No.: 079-27484871, E-mail: [email protected]

(Revised on May 2020)

mailto:[email protected]�

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

RAJENDRA T. GOHIL NABET Approved Noise & Vibration Expert (FAE) 12, Kalapinagar Society, Opp. Abhay Ghat, Gandhi Ashram, Ahmedabad – 380 027 Mob: =91-7698509798, Email: [email protected] Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd, 16, Everest Tower, Opp. Shashtrinagar BRTS Stop,

Ahmedabad -380 013

Kind Attn.: Shri Rakesh Shah Dear Sir :

Sub. : My Association with Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. as a Functional Area Expert in the field of Noise & Vibration (NV)

Ref. : EIA Report of M/s. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP, located at Plot Nos. 96,97,98,99,100,102 & 84 Phase-II, GIDC Vatva, District: Ahmedabad – 382443, State-Gujarat.

This is to certify that I, Rajendra Gohil was a part of the EIA Team that carried out the EIA Study and associated report as stated above. My expertise as a Noise & Vibration (NV) expert was provided for the same. My association may please be stated in the above EIA report. Thanking you, Sincerely, (RAJENDRA GOHIL)

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

OF

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

FOR THE PROPOSED EXPANSION IN EXISTING PRODUCTION CAPACITY

AND ADDITION OF NEW PRODUCTS WITHIN EXISTING PREMISES

[ Project/Activity No.- 5(f), Cat.-‘B’ ]

M/s. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP

Plot Nos. 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, State - Gujarat

October 2019

EIA report for expansion in production capacity of M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP Plot No. 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, Gujarat

Executive Summary

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (E-1) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

Executive Summary M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP is located at Plot No. 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, State - Gujarat, engaged in manufacturing of synthetic organic chemical products such as different Reactive Dyes. Now, company proposes to increase the production capacity of Reactive Dyes and add new Fluorescent Whiteners (Optical Brightening Agents) within existing premises.

Industry proposes to increase their existing production capacity of Reactive Dyes from 125 MT/Month to 990 MT/Month as well as addition of new Fluorescent Whiteners (Optical Brightening Agents) of production capacity 610 MT/Month within existing premises. Total estimated cost of the project would be Rs. 16 Crores out of which approx. Rs. 1.5 Crores is allocated towards pollution control arrangements.

Details of products and production capacity are as detailed under:

PRODUCTS

Sr. No. Name of Product

Quantity of Product (MT/Month)

Existing Proposed Total CAS No.

EXISTING PRODUCT 1 to 100

REACTIVE RED 3BX, E4BA, ME6BL - 6BX, BORDEAUX, HE3B, HE7B, ME3GL, BB, M8B - C & B, BX – R, BX- NEW – RB, 23, PB, 5-B-R, P3B – R, 7BX – R, M5B-C5B, H8B, BSX, RR, HE8BA, C2G, 81, DIRECT RED 227(ROSE FR), ACID RED 57, 131, ACID SCARLET 4 BS,

REACTIVE ORANGE 2 RX, 3 R, HER, H2R, M2R, 78,

REACTIVE BROWN GR, MIX, REACTIVE GREEN B-HE4BD, REACTIVE MAGENTA HB, MB, REACTIVE VIOLET 5R, M4R-C4R, REACTIVE TURQ BLUE G, H5G, HA, REACTIVE BLUE 5 RH-H5R, HER, 3 R, BRF, 4

GX-F2G-RB, HERD, BB, 38-GREEN HE6BL, 199, R, M2R, MR-2B, GG-H H2GL, M4GD, RR, MX7RX, ACID BLUE 45

REACTIVE NAVY BLUE RGB, HE2R-HR, RX-BFN, RNX-3GX,

REACTIVE PURPLE H3R, REACTIVE YELLOW 3RX, ME4GL-4GL, H4G,

FG, RNL, GR, M4R, HE4G, GL, HE6G, M8G, RJ, RL, GCH, SWT, GN, ACID YELLOW H2, REACTIVE GOLDEN YELLOW HR, HER-HE4R-HEXL, MR,

REACTIVE BLACK B, GR-HFGR, GRD-RD, GF-B-N, RL, GRP, HN, MIX, GL, PL, BB, ACID BLACK 107, 194, 52, DIRECT BLACK B

125 -- 125

Existing 100 Products Total (A) 125 -- 125


Executive Summary


Sr. No. Name of Product

Quantity of Product (MT/Month)


PROPOSED PRODUCT

1. REACTIVE BLACK

-- 500 500

--

a. REACTIVE BLACK B 17095-24-8 b. REACTIVE BLACK MIX – WNN/R/G/XLW/DN/GHF/CL5/GR/GF/ MNM/MNG

--

2. REACTIVE YELLOW

-- 220 220

--

a. REACTIVE YELLOW 3RX 80156-97-4

b. REACTIVE YELLOW 4GL 84000-63-5

c. REACTIVE YELLOW XL 780759-89-9

d. REACTIVE YELLOW WNN 607724-40-3 e. REACTIVE YELLOW MIX –

MGB/HB/ULTRA YELLOW MGB/ HW/ S3R --

3. REACTIVE ORANGE

-- 45 45

--

a. REACTIVE ORANGE H2R 12225-85-3

b. REACTIVE ORANGE 2RX 79809-27-1

c. REACTIVE ORANGE 3R (RR) 12225-83-1

d. REACTIVE ORANGE WNN (XLR) 71902-15-3

e. REACTIVE ORANGE CD 292827-64-6

f. REACTIVE ORANGE HER --

g. REACTIVE ORANGE MIX -- 4. REACTIVE RED

-- 150 150

--

a. REACTIVE RED CD 12226-12-9

b. REACTIVE RED 5BX 111211-40-6

c. REACTIVE RED 3GX 80019-42-7

d. REACTIVE RED 3BX 93050-79-4

e. REACTIVE RED CRIMSON HEXL 71002-20-5

f. REACTIVE RED RUBIN XL 125830-50-4

g. REACTIVE RED BS 94158-79-9

h. REACTIVE RED RB 125830-50-4

i. REACTIVE RED 2GX 93051-42-4

j. REACTIVE RED CAR -- k. REACTIVE RED MIX –

XL3B/MGB/MD/MGB/XL/XL4B/K3BS/ RGB --

5. REACTIVE BLUE

-- 75 75

--

a. REACTIVE NAVY BLUE RGB 100 93951-21-4

b. REACTIVE NAVY BLUE GG 84229-70-9

c. REACTIVE BLUE BB 90341-71-2

d. REACTIVE BLUE 3GX 80315-17-9

e. REACTIVE BLUE BRX 86024-59-1


Executive Summary


Sr. No.

Name of Product Quantity of Product (MT/Month)


f. REACTIVE BLUE HEGN ‐‐

g. REACTIVE BLUE MIX – XL/Navy Blue XL/MGB/SG/BLRB/BFN

‐‐

Total (B) ‐‐ 990 990 ‐‐

6. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – 2 B ‐‐ 10 10 27344‐06‐5

7. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BSU ‐‐ 30 30 68971‐49‐3

8. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – DMX ‐‐ 250 250 16090‐02‐1

9. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BBU ‐‐ 35 35 16470‐24‐9

10. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BA ‐‐ 40 40 4193‐55‐9

11. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – 4BB ‐‐ 225 225 4404‐43‐7

12. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – DT ‐‐ 20 20 27344‐41‐8

Total (C) ‐‐ 610 610 ‐‐

TOTAL (A + B + C) 125 1600 1725 ‐‐

It may be noted that the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals products invites the requirement of obtaining Environmental Clearance from the MoEFCC. The stated products falls under project/activity no. 5(f) of Category ‘B’ as stated in the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14‐09‐2006 and therefore Environmental Clearance for these products is required to be obtained.

It was due to this fact that TOR application (Proposal No.: IA/GJ/IND2/134100/2019, dated 08 Feb 2020) was made to MOEF & CC , Delhi for obtaining the related TOR/Environmental Clearance.

Under the provisions of the EIA Notification 2006 as amended, the Standard TOR for the purpose of preparing environment impact assessment report and environment management plan for obtaining prior environment clearance; MOEF & CC has issued the TORs vide their letter Ref. No.: No.IA‐J‐11011/454/2019‐IA‐II(I) dated 24 Feb 2020, copy of the same is attached as Annexure‐1.1. All the aspects of the Terms of References (TORs) are incorporated in the EIA/EMP report.

It may also be noted that the unit is located in notified industrial area i.e. GIDC Vatva, Gujarat hence, public consultation is not applicable.

AIR ENVIRONMENT

The baseline Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) status within 10 km study area has been assessed through a monitoring network of 8 AAQ sampling stations during Summer Season.

Design of network for AAQ monitoring locations were decided on meteorology & available infrastructure facilities.

The baseline AAQ of the study area was monitored for The air quality data with respect to Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen Oxides (NOx), Carbon Monooxide (CO) and VOCs.

Baseline AAQ data indicates that average concentration of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,, CO & VOC in the surrounding area is within the permissible limits as per NAAQ standards.

Based on the baseline AAQ data and ground level concentration evaluated by dispersion modeling, it is found that due to operation of the proposed project, incremental values of various AAQ parameters like PM10,

PM2.5, SO2, and NOx etc will be within the permissible limits as per NAAQ standards.


Executive Summary


NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise level was recorded at eight locations within the study area to provide the baseline data. Baseline data reveals that in the surrounding area noise levels are within the permissible limits as per National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQ).

WATER ENVIRONMENT

Ground and surface water samples were collected within the study area. Its analysis results are as per drinking water standards (IS 10500: 2012) and Class–B outdoor bathing (IS 2296: 1982) as per CPCB except few parameters.

Water Requirement: After proposed expansion the total water requirement during operation phase on 1st day will be 505 kl/day and from 2nd day onwards it will be 339 kl/day.

Wastewater Generation and Disposal: Domestic wastewater (14 Kl/day) will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant while, industrial process wastewater (123 Kl/day) will be treated in Effluent Treatment Plant, Industrial utility wastewater (133 kl/day) will be treated in RO system and 20 kl/day process wastewater with 29 kl/day RO reject will be treated in MEE system.

ETP treated water (123 Kl/day) will be sent to CETP, Vatva while, other treated wastewater from RO & MEE (48 Kl/day + 104 kl/day) will be reused in washing, cooling, boiler operations and in process.

LAND / SOIL ENVIRONMENT

Land pollution occurs due to wastewater, hazardous waste or air pollutants deposited on the land. Domestic wastewater (14 Kl/day) will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant while, industrial process wastewater (123 Kl/day) will be treated in Effluent Treatment Plant, Industrial utility wastewater (133 kl/day) will be treated in RO system and 20 kl/day process wastewater with 29 kl/day RO reject will be treated in MEE system.

ETP treated water (123 Kl/day) will be sent to CETP, Vatva while, other treated wastewater from RO & MEE (48 Kl/day + 104 kl/day) will be reused in washing, cooling, boiler operations and in process.

All the solid/hazardous wastes generated due to the proposed project will be handled and disposed off properly so that no harm to the environment can occur. Adequate air pollution control device / measures will be provided to control the air pollution.

Therefore, there would be no adverse impact on the land environment due to this project.

ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

The baseline biological survey for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment within 10 km from the project site was conducted. There is no Wild Life Sanctuary /National Parks within the study area.

Major crop in the study area during the study period (June) was Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides). Rice (Oryza sativa) is generallycultivated as major crop immediately after monsoon and wheat as a major during winter season in this part of Ahmedabad District. A horticulture activity is not that prominent in this part of Ahmedabad district. Mango trees (Mangifera indica) and Tamarindus trees (Tamarindus indica) were observed adjacent to the residential area and also along the road side at almost all villages.

The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, , Blue Rock Pigeon, Ring Dove etc..

Three fauna that falls under the scheduled-I category was reported from the study area Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) , Woolly necked stork and Mud or Flap shell Turtle. The rest of the fauna reported from the study area, falls under either in schedule-II, Schedule-III or Schedule-IV of the wild Life Protection Act 1972. Most of these species are not conservation dependent in Gujarat, and they are proliferating itself in its own habitats. Few of them like Nilgai and have become threat to the farmers as they are invading their cops very frequently in this region. Hence conservation measures are not provided for these animals


Executive Summary


Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) is a very familiar bird of Gujarat also recognized as National Bird of India. The male peacock is predominantly blue with a fan-like crest of spatula-tipped wire-like feathers and is best known for the long train made up of elongated upper-tail; these stiff and elongated feathers are raised into a fan and quivered in a display during courtship. The female lacks this feathers

Conservation through habitat improvement and awareness: Habitat improvement programme can be undertaken through plantation of suitable tree species in the surrounding villages. While selecting the tree/ shrub species care shall be provided for beery plants which attract these birds .During summer period, villagers will be encouraged to use the old earthen pots to fill with water for drinking these birds. Summer is the time when these birds are facing shortage of feeds, there by supplying the feed like Bajri, Juwar, Maize to the identified surrounding villages with good population of Indian peafowls will suffix the problem of food shortage. The proponent can directly supply these feed to the villages directly or by funding to the NGOs active in this mission.

SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The proposed project will generate direct employment for approx. 135 persons during operation phase. The indirect employment will also be generated by way of transportation, shopkeepers and other casual employment for many people. Local people will be given preference for the jobs in the proposed project. Economic status of the local people will improve due to the increased business opportunities, thereby, making a positive impact. Educational, medical and related facilities in the study area will considerably improve. As well as company will participate in CER activity this will overall improve the economic growth of the area.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

An Environmental Management Plan has been prepared for mitigation of the adverse impacts. The Environmental Management Plan describes in brief, the management plan for and for maintaining the environment. It also includes development of greenbelt, proper safety of workers, environmental monitoring plan, energy conservation, cleaner production, and fire safety.

ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PLAN

The adverse environmental impacts identified during the Environmental Impact Assessment process of the proposed project may increase during the construction as well as operation phase. Monitoring of environmental factors and constrains will enable us to identify the changes in the environmental impacts at various locations and their mitigative measures. To ensure the effective implementation of the EMP, monitoring of ambient air quality, stack emissions, analysis and monitoring of water environment and noise level will be carried out as required / specified by statuary authority.

GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN

A greenbelt area will be developed within the project site to minimize the air pollution, noise pollution, balancing eco-environment, soil erosion / protection etc.

CONCLUSION

Construction phase will not impart appreciable impact, as indicated mitigation measures will be followed. All the necessary air pollution control measures will be provided. No impact on soil and landuse will occur. No adverse impacts will occur on water environment and geo-hydrology. No ecological damage will occur. Economic status of the local population will be improved.


Executive Summary


Various other environmental parameters like Forest/ National Park /Sanctuary and Religious/ Historical Places will not be affected.

Environmental Management Plan has been formulated to control all the pollution control measures and Environmental Management Cell has been set-up to follow the formulated environmental plan.

Onsite/Offsite emergency plan will be prepared to prevent the occurrence of any disaster.

Thus, the proposed project will have overall minor negative impacts on the environment and these impacts will be encountered with proper mitigative measures as detailed in report.

***

EIA report for expansion in production capacity ofM/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP Plot No. 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, Gujarat

Table of Contents

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (i) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

Table of Contents

S.No. Title Page No. a. Executive Summary E1 – E5 b. Table of Contents i c. List of Tables v d. List of Figures vii e. List of Annexures viii f. Abbreviations ix g. TOR & It’s Compliance xi

Chapter-1: Introduction 1.1 – 1.6

1.1. Magnitude of Operation and Cost of Project 1.1 1.2. Identification of Project and Project Proponent 1.1 1.3. Site Selection Criteria 1.2 1.4. Salient Features of Project Site 1.2 1.5. Project Benefits 1.3 1.6. Environmental Statutory and Regulatory Framework 1.3 1.7. Intend of the Report 1.3 1.8. Objectives of EIA Study 1.4 1.9. Scope and Methodology 1.4 1.10. List of applicable Acts and Rules 1.5

Chapter-2: Project Description 2.1-2.37

2.1. Brief Description of Nature of Project 2.1 2.2. Need for the Project and Its Importance 2.1 2.3. Location of the Project 2.1 2.4. Infrastructure Facilities 2.6 2.5. Product Details 2.6 2.6. Raw Material Details 2.8

2.6.1 Raw Material Sources 2.15 2.7. Mode of Transportation of Raw Materials and Products 2.15 2.8. Manufacturing Process Details 2.15 2.9. Water and Wastewater Details 2.15 2.9.1 Wastewater Characteristics for Various Stage/Steps (Operation Phase) 2.16 2.10. Effluent Management System 2.20 2.11. Power, Fuel Consumption and Expected Emissions 2.25 2.11.1 Fugitive Emissions 2.26 2.12. Solvent use and its recovery details 2.26 2.13. Odor and Its Control 2.27 2.14. Solid / Hazardous Waste Details 2.28 2.15. Noise and Vibration 2.29 2.16. Greenbelt Development 2.29

2.16.1 Existing Greenbelt within the project premise 2.29 2.16.2 Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI) 2.31

2.17. Recommended Plants for Greenbelt Development 2.32 2.18. Rain Water Harvesting 2.32 2.19. Man Power Requirement 2.32 2.20. Socio Economic Development / Welfare Activities 2.33 2.21. Occupational Health and Safety 2.34 2.22. Cleaner Production 2.34 2.23. Energy Conservation 2.35


Table of Contents

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (ii) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

S.No. Title Page No. 2.24. Project Implementation Schedule 2.36

Chapter-3: Description of The Environment 3.1 – 3.73

3.1. Introduction 3.1 3.2. Pollution Control Statutory Requirement 3.1 3.3. Scope of Baseline Data Collection 3.1 3.4. Study Period 3.1 3.5. Study Area Map 3.2 3.6. Landuse 3.3

3.6.1 Data Sets 3.3 3.6.2 Study Area 3.3

3.7. Land Environment 3.4 3.7.1 Land Environment using Remote Sensing and GIS Application 3.4 3.7.2 Land use of Study Area 3.5 3.7.3 Visual Interpretation of Satelite Data 3.6 3.7.4 Land Use/Land Cover Classification 3.6 3.7.5 Topography 3.8

3.8. Geology and Soils 3.8 3.8.1 Physiography 3.8 3.8.2 Geology 3.8 3.8.3 Soils 3.9 3.8.4 Geohydrology 3.9 3.8.5 Drainage 3.10

3.9. Meteorology 3.10 3.9.1 Primary Meteorological Data 3.10 3.9.2 Temperature 3.11 3.9.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction 3.11 3.9.4 Wind Rose Diagram 3.11 3.9.5 Secondary Meteorological Data 3.12 3.9.5.1 Relative Humidity and Vapour Pressure 3.12 3.9.5.2 Rainfall 3.12 3.9.5.3 Cloud Cover 3.13

3.10. Air Environment 3.13 3.10.1 Frequency and Period of Monitoring 3.14 3.10.2 Testing Method for AAQ parameters 3.14 3.10.3 Baseline Status of Ambient Air Quality of Study Area 3.15

3.11. Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring 3.16 3.11.1 Duration of Sampling & Methodology 3.16 3.11.2 Results of Ambient Noise Quality 3.17 3.11.3 Baseline Status of Ambient Noise Quality 3.17

3.12. Water Environment 3.17 3.12.1 Selection of Sampling Locations 3.17 3.12.2 Duration of Sampling and Method of Testing 3.18

3.13. Soil Environment (Base-Line Data) 3.23 3.13.1 Duration of Sampling Method of Testing and Results 3.23

3.14. Ecology and Biodiversity 3.23 3.14.1 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment 3.24 3.14.2 Biological Diversity 3.24 3.14.3 Ecological Impact Assessment 3.25 3.14.4 Period of the study and Study area 3.25 3.14.5 Methodology 3.25

3.14.5.1 Presence –Absence 3.26 3.14.5.2 DAFOR Scale: 3.26


Table of Contents

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (iii) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

S.No. Title Page No. 3.14.6 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment 3.26

3.14.6.1 Habitats description of the project site and its immediate surroundings 3.26

3.14.6.2 Habitats description of the area (10 Km) 3.28 3.14.6.3 Floral Diversity of the study area 3.32 3.14.6.3.1 Trees 3.33 3.14.6.3.2 Shrubs 3.34 3.14.6.3.3 Herbs 3.36 3.14.6.3.4 Climbers and Twiners 3.37 3.14.6.3.5 Cultivated Plants in the study area 3.38 3.14.6.3.6 Horticulture Practices and fruit grown 3.38

3.14.6.3.7 Rare and Endangered flora in the study area 3.38 3.14.6.3.8 Endemic Plants of the study area 3.39 3.14.7 Faunal Biodiversity in the study area 3.39

3.14.7.1 Birds of the study area 3.39 3.14.7.2 Butterflies from the study area 3.42 3.14.7.3 Herpetofauna 3.42 3.14.7.4 Mammals 3.43

3.14.7.5 Rare and Endangered fauna of the study area 3.43 3.14.7.6 Endemeic fauna of the study area 3.46 3.14.7.7 Migratory birds & winter visitors in the study area 3.46 3.14.7.8 Status of the forest, their category in the study area 3.46 3.14.7.9 Conservation Measures for the Scheduled-I fauna 3.46

3.14.7.9.1 Conservation Measures for Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavocristatus) Schedule –I bird species 3.47

3.14.7.9.2 Conservation Measures for Indian Mud or Flap Shell Turtle (Lissemys punctuate) Schedule –I reptile 3.49

3.14.7.9.3 Conservation Plan for Asian Woolly Neck Stork, White-Necked Stork, Woolly-Necked Stork (CiconiaEpiscopus) (Iucn Categorized Vulnerable Species)

3.54

3.14.7.9.4 Conservation Measures for House Sparrow 3.57 3.15. Socio- Economic 3.57

3.15.1 Objective 3.57 3.15.2 Methodology 3.57 3.15.3 Outcomes of Socio Economic Study 3.58 3.15.4 Primary Survey 3.58

3.15.4.1 Major Outcomes of Primary Survey 3.58 3.15.5 Scondary Survey (Secondary Data) 3.66

3.15.5.1 Scope 3.66 3.15.5.2 Objective 3.66 3.15.5.3 Socio Economic Layout 3.66 3.15.5.4 Demography 3.66 3.15.5.5 Comparative Demographic Information at Macro Level (2011) 3.67 3.15.5.6 Overview of Ahmedbad economic Activity 3.68 3.15.6 Socio Economic Amenities 3.70 3.15.7 Village wise Demographic Details 3.70

3.15.8 Planning of Socio Economic Development/Welfare Activities 3.73

Chapter-4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts And Mitigation Measures 4.1 – 4.25

4.1. Impact Identification 4.1 4.2. Identification Matrix 4.1 4.3. Impact Identification by Integration 4.2 4.4. Land Environment 4.5


Table of Contents

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (iv) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

S.No. Title Page No. 4.5. Geology and Soil 4.7 4.6. Geohydrology 4.8 4.7. Meteorology 4.10 4.8. Air Environment 4.10

4.8.1 Dispersion Modeling 4.10 4.8.2 About AERMOD 4.11 4.8.3 Meteorological Parameters 4.11 4.8.4 Other Assumptions 4.12

4.9. Noise Environment 4.21 4.10. Water Environment 4.21 4.11. Ecology and Biodiversity 4.21 4.12. Socio-Economic 4.22 4.13. Risk & Hazards 4.23

Chapter-5: Analysis Of Alternatives 5.1 - 5.2

5.1. Site Alternative 5.1 5.2. Alternative for Technologies 5.1

Chapter-6: Environmental Monitoring Program 6.1 – 6.3

6.1. Objectives of Environment Monitoring 6.1 6.2. Details of Environment Monitoring 6.1 6.3. Statutory Environmental Requirements and Reporting Schedules 6.3

Chapter-7: Additional Studies 7.1

7.1. Risk Assessment 7.1 7.2. Social Impact / R&R Action Plan 7.1 7.3. Public Consultation 7.1

Chapter-8: Project Benefits 8.1 – 8.2

8.1. General 8.1 8.2. Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure 8.1 8.3. Improvements in the Social Infrastructure 8.1 8.4. Employment Potential–Skilled; Semi-Skilled and Unskilled 8.1 8.5. Other Tangible Benefits 8.2

Chapter-9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9.1

9.1. Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9.1

Chapter-10: Environmental Management Plan (EMP) 10.1- 10.9

10.1. Objectives of Environmental Management Plan 10.1 10.2. Environmental Management Cell 10.1 10.3. Pollution Control Arrangement / Mitigative Measures 10.3 10.4. Budgetary Allocation For Pollution Control Arrangements 10.9

Chapter-11: Summary And Conclusion 11.1 - 11.3

11.1. Land/ Soil Environment 11.1 11.2. Meteorology and Air Environment 11.1 11.3. Noise Environment 11.1 11.4. Water Environment 11.1 11.5. Geohydrology 11.2 11.6. Geology and Soil 11.2 11.7. Ecology and Biodiversity 11.2 11.8. Socio-Economic Environment 11.2 11.9. Summary of the EIA Study 11.2

Chapter-12: Disclosure of Consultants Engaged 12.1 - 12.2


List of all Tables

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (v) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

List of all Tables

Chapter-1 Table 1-1: Project cost summary ........................................................................................................ 1 Table 1-2: List of Partners ................................................................................................................. 2 Table 1-3: Salient Features of Project Site .......................................................................................... 2

Chapter-2 Table 2-1: Land area break-up .......................................................................................................... 4 Table 2-2: Details of products, by-products and production capacity ................................................ 6 Table 2-3: Details of raw material consumption ............................................................................... 8 Table 2-4: Water Consumption Details ........................................................................................... 16 Table 2-5: Wastewater Generation Details ...................................................................................... 16 Table 2-6: Details of source and power consumption ..................................................................... 25 Table 2-7: Details of fuel, air emissions and APCM ......................................................................... 25 Table 2-8: Details of fugitive emissions ........................................................................................... 26 Table 2-9: Details of Solvent Recovery …………………………………………………………………...27 Table 2-10 :Detailsof Probable Odor Sources and Mitigation Measures ............................................ 28 Table 2-11: Solid/hazardous waste details ........................................................................................ 28 Table 2-12: Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI)of the certain plant species based on the available published literature .......................................................................................................................... 31 Table 2-13: Details of employment / manpower requirement .......................................................... 33 Table 2-14: Details of budget allocated towards CER activities......................................................... 33 Table 2-15: Focus Area on Cleaner Production Activity ................................................................... 34 Table 2-16: Energy conservation activities ....................................................................................... 35 Table 2-17: Project Implementation Schedule .................................................................................. 36

Chapter-3 Table 3-1: Methodology adopted for collection of baseline data ........................................................ 1 Table 3-2: Scope of baseline data collection ...................................................................................... 2 Table 3-3: Data Specification used for present study .......................................................................... 5 Table 3-4: Details of land use / land cover ........................................................................................ 8 Table 3-5: Site specific meteorological data ...................................................................................... 10 Table 3-6: Monthly data of relative humidity and vapour pressure .................................................. 12 Table 3-7: Average rainfall data of Ahmedabad district ................................................................... 12 Table 3-8: Monthly data of cloud amount ...................................................................................... 13 Table 3-9: Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations for the study ................................ 14 Table 3-10: Results of ambient air quality (AAQ) .............................................................................. 15 Table 3-11: Baseline status of ambient air quality .............................................................................. 15 Table 3-12: Location of ambient noise monitoring ........................................................................... 16 Table 3-13: Noise levels at ambient air monitoring stations .............................................................. 17 Table 3-14: Surface water sampling location ..................................................................................... 17 Table 3-15: Ground water sampling location .................................................................................... 18 Table 3-16: Surface water quality ..................................................................................................... 19 Table 3-17: Analysis results of river water ........................................................................................ 20 Table 3-18: Analysis results of GIDC reservoir ................................................................................... 21 Table 3-19: Analysis results of Groundwater .................................................................................... 22 Table 3-20: Soil sampling location details ........................................................................................ 23


List of all Tables

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (vi) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

Table 3-21: Chemical characteristics of soil ...................................................................................... 23 Table 3-22: Trees in the study area ................................................................................................. 33 Table 3-23: List of the shrubs in the study area ................................................................................ 35 Table 3-24: List of herbaceous species observed in the study area .................................................... 36 Table 3-25: List of climbers observed in the area ............................................................................. 38 Table 3-26: Systematic List of birds in the study area with its residential status ................................ 39 Table 3-27: Butterflies in the study area ......................................................................................... 42 Table 3-28: Reptiles in the study area ............................................................................................ 42 Table 3-29: Mammals in the study area ......................................................................................... 43 Table 3-30: Threatened (vulnerable) and near threatened birds of the study area (IUCN, 2019) ....................................................................................................................................................... 43 Table 3-31: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972 ................................. 42 Table 3-32: Social education amenities of the study area ................................................................ 59 Table 3-33: Health facilities of the study area ................................................................................. 59 Table 3-34: Villages infrastructure .................................................................................................. 60 Table 3-35: Summary of Social Amenities ........................................................................................ 61 Table 3-36: Occupational pattern ................................................................................................... 62 Table 3-37: Demography ................................................................................................................ 66 Table 3-38: Comparative demographic information at macro level (2011) ...................................... 67 Table 3-39: Percentage of main workers, marginal workers and non- workers for rural population . 64 Table 3-40: Occupational pattern (industrial categories of main workers) for rural population ........ 69 Table 3-41: Status of different amenities in District and taluka of Study region ................................. 70 Table 3-42: Village wisedemographic details .................................................................................... 71 Table 3-43: Village wise amenities ................................................................................................... 72

Chapter-4 Table 4-1: Prediction of impacts “cause-effect” relationship (during construction phase) ..................... 1 Table 4-2: Prediction of impacts “cause-effect” relationship (during operation phase) ........................ 1 Table 4-3: Sensitivity index ............................................................................................................... 2 Table 4-4: Attribute ranking .............................................................................................................. 3 Table 4-5: Integration consideration ................................................................................................. 4 Table 4-6: Impact and mitigation measures on land environment...................................................... 5 Table 4-7: Impact and mitigation measures on geology and soil environment ................................... 7 Table 4-8: Impact and mitigation measures on groundwater hydrology ............................................ 8 Table 4-9: Data used for the evaluation of the ground level concentration ....................................... 12 Table 4-10: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – PM ............................................................... 14 Table 4-11: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – PM2.5

Table 4-12: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – NOx ............................................................ 16 ............................................................ 14

Table 4-13: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant –SO2

Table 4-14: Impact identification and suggested mitigation measures (S& E) ..................................... 22 .............................................................. 18

Table 4-15: Impact and mitigation measures with respect to Risk & Hazards .................................... 23

Chapter-5 Table 5-1: Analysis of alternative technologies with respect to environment/waste management ........ 1

Chapter-6 Table 6-1: Environmental monitoring programme ............................................................................. 1

Chapter-10 Table 10-1: Environmental management plan for different pollution sources (construction phase) ..... 3 Table 10-2: Environmental management plan for different pollution sources (operation phase) ........ 4


List of all Figures

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (vii) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

Table 10-3: Budgetary allocation towards pollution control arrangements ........................................ 9

List of all Figures

Chapter-2 Figure 2-1: Location on the map of Gujarat ........................................................................................ 1 Figure 2-2: Toposheetmapshowing the project site and study area .................................................... 2 Figure 2-3: Google image showing location of the project and its surroundings .................................. 3 Figure 2-4: Layout plan of the industry (existing and proposed activity area) .................................... 5 Figure 2-5: Water Balance Diagrams................................................................................................. 18 Figure 2-6: Schematic Flow Diagram of ETP ..................................................................................... 23 Figure 2-7: Solvent Recovery System...……………………………………………………………………27 Figure 2-8 :Exisitng Greenbelt .......................................................................................................... 30 Figure 2-8: Bar chart showing project implementation schedule ...................................................... 37 Chapter-3 Figure 3-1: Map of study area ........................................................................................................... 2 Figure 3-2: Location of project site .................................................................................................... 4 Figure 3-3: Pie chart distribution of LU/LC Layers .............................................................................. 7 Figure 3-4: Landuse map of the study area ........................................................................................ 8 Figure 3-5: Windrose diagrams of the study period ...........................................................................11 Figure 3-6: Google imaginary snap shot showing project site and immediate surroundings .............. 27 Figure 3-7: Project site view during the survey period ..................................................................... 27 Figure 3-8: Google imaginary snap shot of the study area ............................................................... 28 Figure 3-9: Habitats description of the area (10 Km)........................................................................ 28 Figure 3-10: Location of Indian Pea fowl, Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle & Woolly necked Stork .. 46 Figure 3-11: Photograph of Indian Pea fowl. .................................................................................... 47 Figure 3-12: Location of Indian Pea fowl ......................................................................................... 49 Figure 3-13: Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle ..................................................................................... 51 Figure 3-14: Location of Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle ................................................................. 50 Figure 3-15: Photograph of Woolly Necked Stork ............................................................................ 54 Figure 3-16: Location Woolly Necked Stork ..................................................................................... 56 Figure 3-17: One to one interaction with Village stake holders ......................................................... 63 Figure 3-18: Comparative Demographic Status of Gujarat Sate & Ahmedabad district. ...................... 67

Chapter-4 Figure 4-1: Data flow in AERMOD modeling system ......................................................................... 11 Figure 4-2: Air quality contour for pollutant – PM ........................................................................... 15 Figure 4-3: Air quality contour for pollutant – PM [on Google image] ............................................. 16 Figure 4-4: Air quality contour for pollutant – NO2

Figure 4-5: Air quality contour for pollutant – NO ......................................................................... 17

2

Figure 4-6: Air quality contour for pollutant – SO [on Google image] ........................................... 18

2

Figure 4-7: Air quality contour for pollutant – SO .......................................................................... 19

2

[on Google image] ........................................... 20

Chapter-10 Figure 10-1: Environmental Management Organogram ...................................................................... 2


List of all Annexures

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (viii) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

List of all Annexures

Chapter- 1 Annexure- 1.1 : Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by SEIAA Annexure- 1.2 : EC Copy and EC Compliance Annexure- 1.3 : GPCB’s Consent Copy and Compliance

Chapter- 2 Annexure- 2.1 : Manufacturing Process of all Products. Annexure- 2.2 : Plot allotment letter Annexure- 2.3 : Water Permission Letter Annexure- 2.4 : Storage Details Annexure-2.5 : Membership Certificates

Chapter- 3 Annexure- 3.1 : National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), 2009 Annexure- 3.2 : Drinking Water Specification (IS 10500 : 2012) Annexure- 3.3 :

The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 - ambient noise standards

Annexure- 3.4 : Damage Risk Criteria For Hearing Loss Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)

Annexure- 3.5 : Photographs Showing Baseline Monitoring/ Sampling Locations

Chapter- 7 Annexure- 7.1 : Risk Assessment Report Annexure-7.2 : Health Check-Up Report of Employee of Existing Unit

Chapter- 10 Annexure- 10.1 : EHS Policy & ISO Certificate copy

Chapter- 12 Annexure- 12.1 : QCI /NABET accreditation details Annexure- 12.2 : NABL Accreditation Annexure-12.3 : Undertaking given by the Project Proponent Annexure- 12.4 : Undertaking given by the Consultant Engaged Miscellaneous Annexures Annexure – 13 : Undertaking regarding Borewell Annexure -14 : Undertaking regarding installation of electrical meter Annexure -15 : Training Document Annexure -16 : Various SOPs of MDIL Annexure -17 : EMS adequacy certificate of existing and proposed system Annexure -18 : Photograph of camera at ETP (CEMS) Annexure -19 : Compliance of audit report recommendation[last 3 years] Annexure -20 : Show cause notices and replys Annexure -21 : Monitoring Report-CETP


List of Abbreviations

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (ix) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

List of Abbreviations

AAQ Ambient Air Quality AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Station ANQM Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring AP Air Pollution APCM Air Pollution Control Measures APHA American Public Health Association APTI Air Pollution Tolerance Index AQ Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling &

Prediction BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand BSI Botanical Survey of India °C Degree Centigrade Ca Calcium CBD Convention on Biological diversity CHWIF Common Hazardous Wastes Incinerator

Facility cm Centimeter Square 2 COD Chemical Oxygen Demand CPCB Central Pollution Control Board CREP Corporate Responsibility for

Environmental Protection CSR Corporate Social Responsibility D.G. Diesel Generator dB Decibel DEM Digital Elevation Model DTM Digital Terrain Model E&S Environment and Safety EAC Expert Appraisal Committee EB Ecology & Biodiversity EC Environmental Clearance EcIA Ecological Impact Assessment EHS Environmental Health & Safety EMP Environmental Management Plan ENG Engineering EPA Environmental Protection Agency ETP Effluent Treatment Plant E-waste Electronic Waste °F Degree Fahrenheit FSI Forest Survey of India GC Gas Chromatography GEO Geology GIS Geographic Information System GLC Ground Level Concentration GPCB Gujarat Pollution Control Board GPS Global Positioning System GSDMA Gujarat State Disaster Management

Authority GW Ground Water H₂ Hydrogen Gas HC Hydrogen Carbons HCl Hydrochloric Acid HG Hydrology , Ground Water and Water

Conservation Hr Hour HSD High Speed Diesel IMD India Meteorological Department IRS-IC Indian Remote Sensing Satellite IS Indian Standard ISCST Industrial Source Complex Short Term ISO International Standard for Organization IUCN International Union for Conservation of

Nature km Kilometer kmph Kilometer per hour KVA Kilo Volt Ampere Leq Equivalent Sound Level

LISSIII/ LISS IV

Linear Imaging Self Scanning

LLP Limited Liability Partnership LU Land Use mm Millimeter MoEF& CC Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate

Change MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet MSIHC Manufacturing, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemicals MT Metric Ton NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standard NABET National Accreditation Board for Education

& Training NEERI National Environmental Engineering

Research Institute NGOs Non Governmental Organizations NOx Nitrogen Oxides NRSC National Remote Sensing Centre NV Noise & Vibration NW North West OSHA Occupational Safety & Health

Administration ppm Parts Per Million QCI Quality Council of India R Residential RH Risk Assessment and Hazard Management RH Relative Humidity SC Scheduled Castes SC Soil Conservation SE South East SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee SEIAA State Level Impact Assessment Authority SHW Solid Waste and Hazardous Waste

Management SI Sensitivity Index SO₂ Sulphur Dioxide SoI Survey of India SPCB State Pollution Control Board SPM Suspended Particulate Matter SS Suspended Solids ST Scheduled Tribe SW South West SW Surface Water TDS Total Dissolved Solids TM Thematic Mapper TOF Trees Outside Forests TOR Terms of Reference TSS Total Suspended Solids UNEP United State Environment Programme USA United States of America USEPA United State Environmental Protection

Agency UTM Universal Transverse Mercator VNIR Visible and Infra Red VOCs Volatile Organic Compounds WM Weather Monitor WP Water Pollution ZSI Zoological Survey of India

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. [NABET/QCI Accredited]

TOR &its Compliance Clarifications, information and data as required in Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by MOEF & CC vide their letter Ref. No.: IA‐J‐11011/454/2019‐IA‐II (I) dated 24th Feb 2020, and also published on MoEFCC website (copy attached as Annexure‐ 1.1).

A tabular chart for point wise reply/ compliance of TOR is stated under:

Sr. No

Terms of Reference (TOR) Reference of TOR in EIA Report

Reply / compliance status description

Page No.

A STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE

1) Executive Summary Attached with the EIA Report ‐‐

2) Introduction

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation

Please refer Chapter‐12, Annexure 12.1

‐‐

ii. Information about the project proponent

Please refer Chapter‐ 1, section 1.2

1.1

iii. Importance and benefits of the project Please refer Chapter‐1, Section 1.5 and Chapter‐8

1.3, 8.1

3) Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion. Total estimated cost of the project would be Rs. 16 Crores out of which approx. Rs. 1.85 Crores is allocated towards pollution control arrangements. Please refer Chapter‐1, Section 1.1 Time schedule for the proposed project including (likely date to start construction, likely date of completion and start operation) are stated under: o Proposed date of start of construction and machine erection/ installation: After getting Environment Clearance from EAC and No Objection Certificate from the GPCB.

o Date of completion: It would be approximately 9‐18 months from the date of start construction and other activities. Construction will start once EC/ NOC will be granted.

o Proposed date of start production: After getting the

1.1, 2.36


Sr. No



Page No.

statutory required Consent & Authorization from the GPCB.

o Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.23

ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.5

2.6

iii. If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.3‐ 2.5 From the beginning MDIL had built up infrastructure which after necessary modification will be sufficient to achieve total targeted production. Moreover, existing open area for the proposed expansion will be utilized. Also high capacity reactor with process optimization will be used. Multi storage facility with Vertical pellets system will be provided. Will maintain minimum inventory of Raw material & will manage our supply chain in such a way that daily production will be dispatched to customer in container.

2.6

iv. List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.6 & 2.7.

2.8

v. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.5, 2.6 and Annexure 2.4

2.6

vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their management.

Chapter 2, Section 2.9, 2.10, 2.11, & 2.14.

2.15‐2.28

vii.

Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man‐power requirement (regular and contract)

Refer Chapter 2, Section 2.9, 2.11, 2.19.

2.15 ‐2.25,2.32

viii.

Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products to be provided

Please refer Annexure –2.1 ‐‐

ix. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.

Please refer Annexure – 7.1 ‐‐

x. Expansion/modernization proposals:

a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments thereto obtained for the project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an

Copy of EC & its compliance has been attached as Annexure‐1.2 Copy of CTO is attached as Annexure‐1.3

‐‐


Sr. No



Page No.

Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests as per circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing existing operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA‐EMP report.

b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent to Establish /No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005‐2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Not applicable ‐‐

4) Site Details

i. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka /Tehsil, District and State, Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.


2.1

ii.

A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10 km and site location on1:50,000/ 1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (Including all eco‐sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places).

Please refer Chapter‐2 , Figure ‐2.2

2.2

iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site.

Chapter‐1 section 1.3 1.2

iv. Co‐ordinates (lat‐long) of all four corners of the site.

Please refer Figure 2.3. Section 2.3of Chapter‐2

2.3

v. Google map‐Earth downloaded of the project site.

Please refer Figure 2.3. Section 2.3, Chapter‐2

2.3

vi.

Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial area/Estate/ Complex, layout of

Please refer Chapter‐2, Figure 2.4 2.5


Sr. No



Page No.

Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial area/Estate.

vii. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Please refer Figure‐2.8, Chapter ‐ 2

2.30

viii.

Landuse break‐up of total land of the project site (identified and acquired), government/private ‐ agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc shall be included. (not required for industrial area).

Please refer Chapter – 2, Table ‐ 2.1, Chapter ‐3, section‐3.7.2

2.4, 3.5

ix.

A list of major industries with name and type within study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated. Land use details of the study area.

Please refer Table 1‐3, Chapter‐1. 1.3

x. Geological features and Geo‐hydrological status of the study area shall be included.

Please refer Section 3.8, 3.8.4 of Chapter‐3

3.8‐3,9

xi. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects).

Please refer Section 3.8.5of Chapter‐3

3.10

xii.

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land.

Meghmani has already acquired the land/plot from GIDC. The proposed expansion in production capacity of Meghmani will be carried out within its existing premises located in notified GIDC, Vatva. Please refer Annexure 2.2 .

‐‐

xiii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy.

Not applicable ‐‐

5) Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):

i.

Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (If applicable).

Not applicable, since project is located in notified GIDC, Vatva, Gujarat.

‐‐

ii.

Landuse map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving forest land more


‐‐


Sr. No



Page No.

than 40 ha).

iii.

Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.


‐‐

iv.

The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis‐à‐vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden‐thereon.


‐‐

v.

Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the study area.


‐‐

vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife.


‐‐

6) Environmental Status

i.

Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site‐specific micrometeorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall.


3.10‐3.13

ii.

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre‐dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.


3.13‐3,15

iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with ‐ min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

Please refer Chapter‐3, Section 3.10, 3.11,3.12,3.13

3.13‐3.23

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River Please refer Chapter‐3, Section 3.17‐3.18


Sr. No



Page No.

(100m upstream and downstream of discharge point) and other surface drains at eight locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.

3.12, and Table 3‐16 to 3‐18.

v.

Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/ MoEF&CC, if yes give details.

Not Applicable ‐‐

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included.

Please refer Chapter‐3, Section 3.12, and Table 3‐19.

3.17

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area.

Please refer Chapter‐3, Section 3.11, and Table 3‐12 and 3‐13.

3.16

viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines.

Please refer Chapter‐3, Table 3.21,Section 3.13

3.23

ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parking arrangement etc.

MDIL has adequate parking spaces, wide internal roads. Please refer Chapter‐2 (Table 2‐1 and Figure 2‐4). And there will be marginal traffic increase due to proposed expansion through vehicle movement (approx. 50 trucks and some other vehicles). Since, MDIL is located in notified GIDC Vatva, Gujarat which has well developed internal / approach roads and there is marginal traffic on the same. However, the factory road is connected to 6.5 m wide GIDC road would have ultimate carrying capacity 1500 PCU/ hour as per IRC. The main GIDC road is connected to state highway. Thus, no traffic issues are anticipated.

‐‐

x.

Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule‐I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished.


3.23

xi. Socio‐economic status of the study area. Please refer Chapter‐3, Section 3.15

3.57

7) Impact and Environment Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site‐specific

Please refer Chapter‐4, Section 4.7, 4.8

4.8, 4.10


Sr. No



Page No.

meteorological features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used for modelling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

ii. Water Quality modelling ‐ in case of discharge in water body


iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail‐cum road transport or conveyor cum rail transport shall be examined.


2.15

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rules.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.9, 2.10

2.15‐2.20

v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meet standards.


2.25

vi. Measures for fugitive emission control Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.11.1

2.26

vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and management. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous waste in cement plant shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste‐minimization, recycle/ reuse/recover techniques, energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.14.

2.28


Sr. No



Page No.

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

Fly ash will be sold to brick manufacturer, cement industries, and dump off at low lying areas

‐‐

ix.

Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.16,

2.29

x.

Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.


2.32

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures shall be included.


10.9

xii. Action plan for post‐project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.

Please refer Chapter‐6 6.1

xiii.

Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man‐made) Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan.

Please refer Chapter‐7 and Annexure 7.1

7.1

8) Occupational health

i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and casual workers

Please refer Chapter‐7, Annexure 7.1,Chapter‐10, Section 10.4

‐‐

ii.

Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers' health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details

Please refer Chapter‐7, Annexure 7.1, 7.2, Chapter‐10, Section 10.4

‐‐


Sr. No



Page No.

regarding last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

iii. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.21.Chapter‐7, Annexure 7.1. Chapter‐6, Section 6.2 and Chapter‐10, Section 10.4

2.34,6.1, 10.9

iv.

Annual report of heath status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety.

Please refer Chapter‐7, Annexure 7.2.

‐‐

9) Corporate Environment Policy

i.

Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Please refer Annexure 10.1 ‐‐

ii.

Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process/ procedures to bring into focus any infringement/ deviation /violation of the environmental or forest norms/ conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.

Please refer Chapter‐6, Section 6.3, Chapter‐10, Section 10.2 and also refer Annexure 10.1

6.2,6.3 ,10.2‐10.3

iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

Chapter‐10, Section 10.2 and also referAnnexure 10.1

10.2‐10.3

iv. Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances/ violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and/ or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report.


10.1

10) Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

Chapter‐10, Section 10.3 10.3

11) Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i.

Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project cost) shall be earmarked

Company proposes Corporate Environmental Responsibility

2.33

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd.

[NABET/QCI Accredited]

towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues and item‐wise details along with time bound action plan shall be included. Socio‐economic development activities need to be elaborated upon.

RESPONSIBILITY (CER) FOR WHICH RS. 32 LAKHS (DOUBLE CER AS PER THE MINISTRY’S OFFICE MEMORANDUM 31ST OCTOBER, 2019 REGARDING PROJECTS LOCATED IN CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA) WILL BE ALLOCATED. PLEASE REFER CHAPTER – 2, TABLE 2‐20.

12) Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status of the case.


13) 'A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TOR.

Complied ‐‐

B. SPECIFIC TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIA STUDIES FOR SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS INDUSTRY (DYES & DYE INTERMEDIATES; BULK DRUGS AND INTERMEDIATES EXCLUDING DRUG FORMULATIONS; SYNTHETIC RUBBERS; BASIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS, OTHER SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS AND CHEMICAL INTERMEDIATES)

1. Details on solvents to be used, measures for solvent recovery and for emissions control.

Refer Chapter – 2, section 2.12 2.26

2. Details of process emissions from the proposed unit and its arrangement to control.

Please refer Chapter‐2, section 2.11

2.25

3. Ambient air quality data should include VOC, other process‐specific pollutants* like NH3*, chlorine*, HCl*, HBr*, H2S*, HF*,etc.,(*‐as applicable)

Please refer Chapter‐3, section 3.10.3

3.15

4. Work zone monitoring arrangements for hazardous chemicals.

Chapter‐6, Chapter ‐10, Section 10.3, Annexure 7.1

6.1,10.3

5. Detailed effluent treatment scheme including segregation of effluent streams for units adopting 'Zero' liquid discharge.

Chapter‐2, Section 2.10 2.20

6. Action plan for odour control to be Chapter‐2, Section 2.13 2.27


submitted.

7. A copy of the Memorandum of Understanding signed with cement manufacturers indicating clearly that they co‐process organic solid/ hazardous waste generated.


8. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of liquid effluent in CETP and solid/hazardous waste in TSDF, if any.


9. Action plan for utilization of MEE/dryers salts.

Will be disposed to TSDF Site ‐‐

10. Material Safety Data Sheet for all the Chemicals are being used/will be used.

Please refer Annexure‐7.1 ‐‐

11. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of solid/hazardous waste in TSDF.


12. Details of incinerator if to be installed. Not Applicable ‐‐

13. Risk assessment for storage and handling of hazardous chemicals/solvents. Action plan for handling & safety system to be incorporated.

Please refer Annexure‐7.1 ‐‐

14. Arrangements for ensuring health and safety of workers engaged in handling of toxic materials.

Please refer Chapter‐2, Section 2.21,Chapter‐10, Section 10.3, Annexure‐7.1, 7.2

‐‐


Introduction

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (1. 1) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

Chapter 1. Introduction

M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLPis located at Plot No. 96,97,98,99,100,102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, State - Gujarat, engaged in manufacturing of synthetic organic chemical products such as different Reactive Dyes. Now, company proposes to increase the production capacity of Reactive Dyes and add new Fluorescent Whiteners (Optical Brightening Agents) within existing premises.

1.1 Magnitude of Operation and Cost of Project

Industry proposes to increase their existing production capacity of Reactive Dyes from 125 MT/Month to 1115 MT/Month as well as addition of new Fluorescent Whiteners (Optical Brightening Agents) of production capacity 610 MT/Month within existing premises. As per the EIA Notification 14th September 2006 the stated products falls under the project / activity no. 5(f) of Category ‘B’. Total estimated cost of the proposed project would beRs. 16 Crores out of which approx.Rs. 1.85 Crore is allocated towards pollution control arrangements. The project cost break-up details ispresented underTable 1-1.

Table 1-1: Project cost summary

Sr. No.

Description Rs. (in Crores) Existing Proposed Total

1 Land & Land Development 0.80 0 0.80

2 Factory Building & Office 2.00 1.50 3.50

3 Plant & Machineries 9.00 13.00 22.00

4 Pre operative Expenses 0 1.50 1.50

Total Project Cost 11.8 16.0 27.8

1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent

The Meghmani group has a vast experience in manufacturing of Pigments, PVC Flex Banner, PVC Foam Board, Dyes, Optical brightening agent (Fluorescent Whiteners) and Dye Intermediates such as H-acid & VS. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP is one of the divisions of Meghmani Group and it is mainly associated with manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Dyessince its establishment. It has commissioned its state-of-the-art plant with a big size spray drier to manufacture reactive dyes in agglomerated grains. The most modern plant has the technology of ‘NIRO’ the world’s leader in spray drying technology. By acquiring this facility, Meghmani has earned a position among the very few companies in the world and the only one in India for reactive dyes. It is an ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and ISO 18001 certified company. It has also received certification/recognition from Blue Sign & ETAD. Being the distinguished manufacturer, exporter and supplier in India, Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP is a company adherent to optimum quality and better client's satisfaction. Now, as the market demand is increasing day by day it is the key reason for continuous growth in this sector. Thus, Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP is planning to expand its existing production capacity of reactive dyes and addition of new optical brightening agents at Plot No.: 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, Phase – II GIDC Vatva, District: Ahmedabad, State: Gujarat. Partners of the company are listed in Table 1-2.


Introduction

Table 1‐2: List of Partners

Sr. No. Name Address

1 Mr. Lalitbhai Kantibhai Patel 31, Park Hill Society, Nr. Narmada Vasahat, Opp. Karnavati Club, Satellite, Ahmedabad

2 Mr. Prafulbhai Ganpatbhai Patel Dwarpal Bunglow, Nr. Rajpath Club, Bodakdev, Ahmedabad.

3 Mr. Karan Rameshbhai Patel 54, Shrinath Society, B/H. Manekbag Society, Ambavadi, Ahmedabad

4 Mr. Ankit Natwarbhai Patel 1, Ashok Vatika, Ambli‐Bopal Road, Ahmedabad

1.3 Site Selection Criteria

Since the expansion of project will be carried out within the existing premises. The said area already has following facilities; also refer Chapter‐5 for the same.

Location within the established notified industrial estate.

Availability of common infrastructural facilities of the industrial estate.

Availability of good quality water supply in the industrial estate.

Availability of authorized solid waste disposal site in nearby area.

Availability of requisite skilled, semi‐skilled and unskilled labour from local area.

Facilities such as power, water, communication etc. are easily available.

1.4 Salient Features of Project Site

Geography and Climate of the area:

Ahmedabad is located between 22°0' and 23°35' North latitudes and 71°42' and 72°50' east longitudes. It has an average elevation of 53 metres (174 feet). Ahmedabad district forms a part of Gujarat Plain and is sub‐divided into five sub micro regions, namely Viramgam Plain, Sabarmati Basin, Khari Meshwo Plain, Bhadar Bhogavo Low Land and Bhadar River Plain on the basis of topography, climate geology, soils and natural vegetation. The Ahmedabad district is surrounded by Mahesana (North), Gandhinagar (North‐East), Kheda & Anand (South) districts and Gulf of Khambhat and Bhavnagar and Surendranagar districts (West). The climate of Ahmedabad district is characterized by a hot summer and general dryness except during the south‐west monsoon season. The winter season is preceded by a short autumn which lasts from late September to about early November. The cold season from December to February is followed by the hot season from March to May. The climate of the Ahmedabad district except in the southern tract near the sea Coast ranges is severe winters to hot summers. The period from June to September is the southwest monsoon season. October and November constitute the post monsoon season.

Table 1‐3: Salient features of project site

S.No. Particulars Details

1. Project /plant location Plot No. 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102 & 84, GIDC Phase‐II, Vatva, Dist.‐Ahmedabad, Gujarat

2. Project site coordinates Latitude: 22° 57’ 35.2”N, Longitude: 72° 38’ 27.7”E

3. Airport Ahmedabad (12.67 km)

4. Railway Kalupur, Ahmedabad (8.31 km)

5. National / state highways National Highway NH‐47

6. Seaport Kandla Sea Port

7. Plant site topography Plain

8. Present land use within study area Land use pattern is notified for industrial use

9. Reserved/protected forests within study area None

10. National parks/wildlife sanctuaries None

http://tools.wmflabs.org/geohack/geohack.php?pagename=Bharuch&params=21.7_N_72.97_E_�


Introduction

S.No. Particulars Details

11. Rivers/stream/reservoir/lakes/dams etc. within study area

Sabarmati River, Kakaria Lake

12. Estuary/sea Estuary, river Sabarmati and sea (Gulf of Cambay).

13. Seismicity Zone III Moderately Active

14. Archaeological sites within study area None

15. Defence installation within study area None

16. Major industries Chemical, Dyes & Dye‐intermediate, Engineering, Food, Pharmaceuticals, Foundries, Plastic & Rubber, Textiles Industries viz. Parle agro Private Limited, Intas Pharma Ltd., Nirma Chemicals Works, Acme Air Equipments Company Pvt. Ltd., Matangi Industries LLP, wellbore engineering co., Zydus Cadila Healthcare Ltd., Jindal Texofab Ltd., Godrej & Boyce Mfg. etc.

1.5 Project Benefits

The project activities would generate additional employment for activities like transportation, raw material supply, auxiliary, ancillary works etc. The project has favorable ranking by majority of local people and is looked upon as a step for further development of the area by way of improvement in transport, communication and amenities like telephone booths and other basic requirements for working population of the project and village community.

1.6 Environmental Statutory and Regulatory Framework

The MoEFCC, CPCB and SPCBs/PCC together form the regulatory and administrative core of the sector. Legislation for environmental protection in India is mainly EIA Notification‐2006; Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act‐1974; Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act‐1981; Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977; Hazardous Wastes and Other Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2016, Public Liability Insurance Act, Environment Protection Act as well as other related Act/ Rules/ Notification made thereunder and as amended from time to time.

Environmental Clearance (EC) and its Compliance: The existing unit has obtained EC: SEIAA/GUJ/EC/5(f)/40/2009, dated 09‐04‐2009 from SEIAA, Gujarat. (IT MAY BE NOTED THAT WE COULD NOT PROCEED WITH WORK/PRODUCTION RELATED TO THE SAID EC GRANTED IN 2009 BECAUSE VATVA WAS ADJUDGED TO BE A CRITICAL AREA DUE TO WHICH GPCB COULD NOT GRANT THE RELATED NOC) Copy attached as Annexure‐1.2.

Consent to Establish / Consolidated Consent & Authorization (CC&A) and its Compliance: The existing unit has obtained Consent to Establish (CTE) from GPCB Vide Letter No.:ABD/VT‐NOC/2153/3153 dated 03‐02‐2003 and Consolidated Consent & Authorization (CC&A) Order No. AWH‐ 103151, valid up to 23/06/2024 copy attached as Annexure‐1.3.

1.7 Intend of the Report

It may be noted that the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals products invites the requirement of obtaining Environmental Clearance from the MoEFCC/SEIAA. The stated products falls under project/activity no. 5(f) of Category ‘B’ as stated in the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14‐09‐2006 and therefore Environmental Clearance for these products is required to be obtained. It was due to this fact that TOR application (Proposal No.: SIA/GJ/IND2/30839/2019, dated 04 April 2019) was made to SEAC/SEIAA, Gujarat for obtaining the related TOR/Environmental Clearance. But at that time vatva was fall under CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA so we apply to obtain environmental clearance from MOEFCC, Delhi.

Under the provisions of the EIA Notification 2006 as amended, the Standard TOR for the purpose of preparing environment impact assessment report and environment management plan for obtaining prior environment clearance; MOEFCC has issued the TORs vide their letter Ref. No.: IA‐J‐11011/454/2019‐IA‐II(I) dated 24 Feb 2020, copy of the same is attached as Annexure‐1.1. All the aspects of the Terms of References (TORs) are incorporated in the EIA/EMP report.


Introduction


It may also be noted that the unitis located in notified industrial area i.e. GIDCVatva, Ahmedabad, Gujarathence, public consultation is not applicable.

1.8 Objectives of EIA Study

The main objectives of the present EIA study are:

To have an in-depth know-how of the project and to indentify the probable sources of pollution that may arise due to proposed manufacturing activity of M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP

To assess existing environmental status of air quality, water quality, noise level, land/soil, ecological, socio-economic components and risk hazards as per suggested /standard TOR.

To identify and quantify the significant impacts of the proposed expansion project on the environment components.

To prepare Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and suggest preventive and mitigative measures to minimize adverse impacts and to maximize beneficial impacts.

1.9 Scope and Methodology

The Environment Impact Assessment study was carried out as per suggested TOR which includes Identification, Assessment, Quantitative Evaluation and Prediction of possible impacts and its mitigation. For identification of impacts a well-planned monitoring programme had been formulated for conducting Baseline Environmental Monitoring (BEM).

For quantitative evaluation and prediction of possible impacts, an impact identification matrix technique is used for quantification of pollution potential and its environmental assimilation capacity. The work carried out is described below and has been described in details in subsequent chapters.

a) Land/ soil environment: To know the present landuse pattern of the study area landuse mapping for 10 km radius were developed, landuse mapping contain information mainly regarding landuse such as agriculture cultivated or uncultivated lands. Ancillary datasets contain useful information on smaller scale land use such as reserved forests, protected areas, urban and other types, identification of impacts due to proposes operations through mapping. Soil samples were collectedand analysed. The baseline data was used for assessing the impact of the project on soil environment.

b) Air environment: The prevailing ambient air quality status was established through a network of stations monitored during the study period. The air quality data with respect to Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen Oxides (NOx), Carbon Monooxide (CO)and VOCs (as BTX) were carried out for the study area of 10 km radius. Prediction of impacts on air quality due to proposed operations was carried out through application of air quality models as stipulated in “Assessment of impacts on Air Environment; Guidelines for conducting Air Quality Modeling”- a publication of central pollution control board.

c) Noise environment: Noise level measurements were carried out around the project site and data were also analyzed for establishing baseline status of noise.

d) Water environment: The water quality data with respect to physico-chemical, biological parameters and heavy metals were analyzed to established baseline water quality of study area of 10 km radius.

The wastewater generation and its characterization were carried out in and around the study. Adequacy of the effluent treatment plant was evaluated for the proposed operations. Geohydrological investigation work has also been carried out in and around the study area to know the status of availability of water resource/ground water potential.

e) Geo-hydrology: Geo-hydrological investigation work has been carried out in and around the study area to know the status of availability of minerals resources, subsurface water, elevation etc. and baseline data used for assessing impacts.

f) Ecological environment: Study of flora and fauna was carried out within 10 km radius around the proposed project. Field observations were made at different sampling points and qualitative as well as quantitative analysis of the vegetation was carried out.


Introduction


g) Socio-economic environment: The main objective of the study is to conduct demographic analysis for villages/towns coming in the radial distance of 10 km using available census data to describe inference related to demographic, social and economic conditions of the region and to conduct the social impact assessment in context to upcoming said project of M/s Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP. Further it also narrate the social development program identified and would be undertaken by the company under Corporate Social Responsibility.

h) Risk assessment: RiskAssessment helps toevaluaterisk, assess its impact and plan the appropriate action to control risk by the most economical means. The objective is to implement cost effective measures that reduce risks to an acceptable level. Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) is an accident with maximum damage distance, which is believed to be probable.

MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and compute the consequences effects in terms of damage distance due to heat radiation, toxic releases, vapor cloud explosion etc.

1.10 List of applicable Acts and Rules

Legal Instrument Applicability Objective of Legislation Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and amendments

Air pollutants from chemical industries

The prevention, control andabatement of air pollution

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and amendments

Water Pollutants from water polluting industries

The prevention and controlof water pollution and alsomaintaining or restoring thewholesomeness of water

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Rules, 1975 and amendments

Water Pollutants from water polluting industries

The prevention and controlof water pollution and alsomaintaining or restoring thewholesomeness of water

The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and amendments

All types of environmental pollutants

Protection and Improvement of the Environment

Environmental (Protection) Rules, 1986 and amendments

All types of Environmental Pollutants

Protection and Improvement of the Environment

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 and amendments

Hazardous Wastes generated from industries using hazardous chemicals

Management & Handling ofhazardous wastes in line withthe Basel convention

Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 and amendments

to every domestic, institutional, commercial and any other non residential solid waste generator

Management of solid wastes

E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016 and amendments

e-waste or electrical and electronic equipment listed in Schedule I

Management of e-waste

Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016 and amendments

Every waste generator, local body, Gram Panchayat, manufacturer, Importers and producer.

Management of plastic waste

Construction and Demolition Waste Management Rules,

every waste resulting from construction, re-modeling, repair

Management of construction and demolition waste


Introduction


2016 and amendments and demolition of any civil structure

Manufacture Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 and amendments

Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Explosive, Flammable, Reactive

Regulate the manufacture,storage and import ofHazardous Chemicals

Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996 and amendments

Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Explosive, Flammable, Reactive

Emergency PlanningPreparedness and Responseto chemical accidents

EIA Notification, 2006 and amendments

For all the identified developmental activities in the notification

Requirement ofenvironmental clearance before establishment of ormodernization / expansion ofidentified developmental projects

Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and amendments

Hazardous Substances To provide immediate reliefto persons affected byaccident involving hazardous substances

Public Liability Insurance Rules, 1991 and amendments

Hazardous Substances To provide immediate reliefto persons affected byaccident involving hazardous substances and also forEstablishing an Environmental Relief fund

Factories Act, 1948 and amendments

Chemicals as specified in the Table

Control of workplaceenvironment, and providingfor good health and safety of workers

The Motor Vehicle Act, 1988 and amendments

Hazardous and Dangerous Goods

To consolidate and amendthe law relating to motorvehicles

The Central Motor Vehicle Rules, 1989 and amendments

Hazardous and Dangerous Goods

To consolidate and amendthe law relating to motorvehicles including to regulate the transportation ofdangerous goods with a view to prevent loss of life ordamage to the environment


Project Description


Chapter 2. Project Description

2.1 Brief Description of Nature of Project

M/s.MeghmaniDyes and Intermediates LLPisengaged in production of synthetic organic chemical products such as different SO Dyes. Now, company proposes to increase the production capacity of SO Dyes and add new Fluorescent Whiteners (Optical Brightening Agents) within existing premises.Detail production capacity is given in Table-2.2.

2.2 Need for the Project and Its Importance

The project is being set-up for expansion in production capacity by increasing the production capacity of existing products and addition of few new products in existing production plant. The technology is totally proven and safe in all aspects. The project will help industrial development in the region. Various products have export potential and will help in own’s economy by generating foreign exchange and will increase employment opportunities in the region. Other factors include: Cost Competitiveness Easy Availability of skilled and non-skilled workers Availability of well developed infrastructure facility Well Connectivity of road, railways etc. There should be positive impact on the socio-economic condition of the area in terms of direct and indirect employment due to the proposed project during construction /operation phase.

2.3 Location of the Project

The proposed industrial activity is to be carried out with in existing premises of M/s.MeghmaniDyes and Intermediates LLPwhichislocated at Plot No. 96,97,98,99,100,102 & 84, GIDC Phase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahmedabad, State – Gujarat.Description of project location and it‘ssurrounding is also given in Chapter-1and Chapter-3.

Map showing the Ahmedabad District in Figure 2-1.Toposheet mapshowing the project site &it’s surrounding is shown in Figure 2-2.Google image showing the project site &its surrounding area is shown in Figure 2-3.Layout plan of the industry (existing and proposed proposedacticity area) is shown in Figure 2-4.Break-up of total land area and proposed infrastructure facilities details are given in Table 2-1.Plot allotment letter attached as Annexure 2.2.

Figure 2-1: Location on the map of Gujarat

District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat


Project Description


Figure 2-2: Toposheetmapshowingthe project site and study area


Project Description


Figure 2-3: Google image showing location of the project and its surroundings

(a)

(b)

S.N. Desciption Latitude Longitude A NW corner of project site 22°57'38.89"N 72°38'24.28"E B West corner of project site 22°57'36.05"N 72°38'25.08"E C SW corner of project site 22°57'34.69"N 72°38'26.23"E D South corner of project site 22°57'35.91"N 72°38'27.80"E E South corner of project site 22°57'34.49"N 72°38'28.14"E F SE corner of project site 22°57'35.17"N 72°38'30.87"E G ENE corner of project site 22°57'38.13"N 72°38'29.91"E H NE corner of project site 22°57'40.00"N 72°38'28.39"E


Project Description

Table 2‐1: Land area break‐up

Sr. No.

Description Area (m2)

Existing Proposed Total

1. Manufacturing process area 2,800 2,400 5,200

2. Storage (raw materials) 800 1,200 2,000

3. Storage (product) 2,000 1,500 3,500

4. Storage (fuel) 40 150 190

5. Storage (water) 37 25 62

6. Storage (hazardous/solid waste) 100 100 200

7. Storage (hazardous chemicals) 100 100 200

8. Road 2,400 0 2,400

9. Admin 300 0 300

10. Others 5,725 ‐5,625 100

11. Greenbelt Area *

Total area available or proposed expansion 16,802 0 16,802

Note: * It may be noted that total greenbelt area will be 6721 M2 (40 % AS PER THE MINISTRY’S OFFICE MEMORANDUM 31ST OCTOBER, 2019 REGARDING PROJECTS LOCATED IN CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA).


Project Description


Figure 2-4: Layout plan of the industry (existing and proposed proposedacticity area)


Project Description

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (2.6) (QCI/ NABET Accredited)

2.4 Infrastructure Facilities

In our pursuit of excellence we always strive for best available technologies (BAT) processes which are safe, givequality products, give maximum yields, generate less of effluents/ byproducts andareeconomical.Existinginfrastructure after some necessary below modifications will be sufficient to achieve total targeted production.

• Almost all the existing open spaces will be utilized for the proposed expansion. • High capacity reactor with process optimizationwill be used. • Multi storage facilitieswithvertical pellets system will be provided. • We will maintain minimum inventory of raw material & will manage our supply chain in such a way

that daily production will be dispatched to customer in containers.

2.5 Product Details

The details of production capacity with existing products for which Environmental Clearnce/Consent has been obtained and proposed products are given in Table- 2.2.

Table 2-2: Details of products, by-products and production capacity

PRODUCTS

Sr. No.



EXISTING PRODUCT

1 to 100

• REACTIVE RED 3BX, E4BA, ME6BL - 6BX, BORDEAUX, HE3B, HE7B, ME3GL, BB, M8B - C & B, BX – R, BX- NEW – RB, 23, PB, 5-B-R, P3B – R, 7BX – R, M5B-C5B, H8B, BSX, RR, HE8BA, C2G, 81, DIRECT RED 227(ROSE FR), ACID RED 57, 131, ACID SCARLET 4 BS,

• REACTIVE ORANGE 2 RX, 3 R, HER, H2R, M2R, 78,

• REACTIVE BROWN GR, MIX,

• REACTIVE GREEN B-HE4BD,

• REACTIVE MAGENTA HB, MB,

• REACTIVE VIOLET 5R, M4R-C4R,

• REACTIVE TURQ BLUE G, H5G, HA,

• REACTIVE BLUE 5 RH-H5R, HER, 3 R, BRF, 4 GX-F2G-RB, HERD, BB, 38-GREEN HE6BL, 199, R, M2R, MR-2B, GG-H H2GL, M4GD, RR, MX7RX, ACID BLUE 45

• REACTIVE NAVY BLUE RGB, HE2R-HR, RX-BFN, RNX-3GX,

• REACTIVE PURPLE H3R,

• REACTIVE YELLOW 3RX, ME4GL-4GL, H4G, FG, RNL, GR, M4R, HE4G, GL, HE6G, M8G, RJ, RL, GCH, SWT, GN, ACID YELLOW H2, REACTIVE GOLDEN YELLOW HR, HER-HE4R-HEXL, MR,

125 -- 125


Project Description


Sr. No.



• REACTIVE BLACK B, GR-HFGR, GRD-RD, GF-B-N, RL, GRP, HN, MIX, GL, PL, BB, ACID BLACK 107, 194, 52, DIRECT BLACK B

Existing 100 Products Total (A) 125 -- 125

PROPOSED PRODUCT

1. REACTIVE BLACK

-- 500 500

--

a. REACTIVE BLACK B 17095-24-8

b. REACTIVE BLACK MIX – WNN/R/G/XLW/DN/GHF/CL5/GR/GF/ MNM/MNG

--

2. REACTIVE YELLOW

-- 220 220

--

a. REACTIVE YELLOW 3RX 80156-97-4

b. REACTIVE YELLOW 4GL 84000-63-5

c. REACTIVE YELLOW XL 780759-89-9

d. REACTIVE YELLOW WNN 607724-40-3

e. REACTIVE YELLOW MIX – MGB/HB/ULTRA YELLOW MGB/ HW/ S3R

--

3. REACTIVE ORANGE

-- 45 45

--

a. REACTIVE ORANGE H2R 12225-85-3

b. REACTIVE ORANGE 2RX 79809-27-1

c. REACTIVE ORANGE 3R (RR) 12225-83-1

d. REACTIVE ORANGE WNN (XLR) 71902-15-3

e. REACTIVE ORANGE CD 292827-64-6

f. REACTIVE ORANGE HER --

g. REACTIVE ORANGE MIX --

4. REACTIVE RED

-- 150 150

--

a. REACTIVE RED CD 12226-12-9

b. REACTIVE RED 5BX 111211-40-6

c. REACTIVE RED 3GX 80019-42-7

d. REACTIVE RED 3BX 93050-79-4

e. REACTIVE RED CRIMSON HEXL 71002-20-5

f. REACTIVE RED RUBIN XL 125830-50-4

g. REACTIVE RED BS 94158-79-9

h. REACTIVE RED RB 125830-50-4

i. REACTIVE RED 2GX 93051-42-4

j. REACTIVE RED CAR --

k. REACTIVE RED MIX – XL3B/MGB/MD/MGB/XL/XL4B/K3BS/ RGB

--

5. REACTIVE BLUE -- 75 75

--

a. REACTIVE NAVY BLUE RGB 100 93951-21-4


Project Description


Sr. No.



b. REACTIVE NAVY BLUE GG 84229-70-9

c. REACTIVE BLUE BB 90341-71-2

d. REACTIVE BLUE 3GX 80315-17-9

e. REACTIVE BLUE BRX 86024-59-1

f. REACTIVE BLUE HEGN --

g. REACTIVE BLUE MIX – XL/Navy Blue XL/MGB/SG/BLRB/BFN

--

Total (B) -- 990 990 --

6. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – 2 B -- 10 10 27344-06-5

7. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BSU -- 30 30 68971-49-3

8. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – DMX -- 250 250 16090-02-1

9. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BBU -- 35 35 16470-24-9

10. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – BA -- 40 40 4193-55-9

11. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – 4BB -- 225 225 4404-43-7

12. OPTICAL BRIGHTENING AGENT – DT -- 20 20 27344-41-8

Total (C) -- 610 610 --

TOTAL (A + B + C) 125 1600 1725 --

2.6 Raw Material Details

The total consumption of raw materials for the above stated proposed productsis given in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3: Details of raw material consumption

Sr. no.

Name of the Products

Name of the Raw Materials

CAS no. / CI no. of raw materials.

Quantity MT/Month

Existing Proposed Total 101 REACTIVE BLACK Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 246.00 246.00

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 103.45 103.45 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 61.56 61.56 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 135.00 135.00 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 131.00 131.00

102 REACTIVE YELLOW Reactive Yellow 3RX

K-Acid 118-03-6 0.0 61.49 61.49 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 11.06 11.06 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 11.00 11.00 Meta Ureido Aniline 59690-88-9 0.0 24.18 24.18 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 36.30 36.30 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 28.60 28.60 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 19.80 19.80 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 44.00 44.00

Reactive Yellow 4GL

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 40.70 40.70 Meta PhenyleneDiamineSu

88-63-1 0.0 58.30 58.30


Project Description


lphonicAcid Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 13.20 13.20 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 67.10 67.10 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 41.80 41.80 2-Pyridone 142-08-5 0.0 4.40 4.40 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 83.60 83.60 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 61.60 61.60 Para Base Vinyl Sulphone Ester

2494-89-5 0.0 495.00 495.00

Reactive Yellow XL

K-Acid 118-03-6 0.0 48.62 48.62 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 24.20 24.20 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 17.82 17.82 Meta Ureido Aniline 59690-88-9 0.0 19.36 19.36 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 60.28 60.28 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 23.32 23.32 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 36.74 36.74 Meta PhenyleneDiamineSulphonic Acid

88-63-1 0.0 24.86 24.86

Reactive Yellow WNN

Sulpho Vinyl Sulphone

3039-83-6 0.0 71.50 71.50

Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 25.30 25.30 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 61.60 61.60 Meta PhenyleneDiamineSulphonic Acid

88-63-1 0.0 39.60 39.60

Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 57.20 57.20 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 44.00 44.00

103 REACTIVE ORANGE Reactive Orange H2R

N Methyl J Acid 22346-43-6 0.0 11.25 11.25 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 2.93 2.93 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 7.88 7.88 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 13.50 13.50 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 26.10 26.10 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 2.25 2.25 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 15.75 15.75 Sodium Chloride 7647-14-5 0.0 33.75 33.75 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 7.88 7.88 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 2.25 2.25 Ammonia Liquor 1336-21-6 0.0 11.25 11.25

Reactive Orange 2RX

J-Acid 87-02-5 0.0 9.00 9.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 16.88 16.88 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 6.08 6.08 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 5.85 5.85 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 11.25 11.25 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 19.80 19.80 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 2.70 2.70


Project Description


Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 2.93 2.93 Sodium Chloride -- 0.0 18.00 18.00 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 6.08 6.08 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 9.00 9.00

Reactive Orange 3R (RR)

Para Base Vinyl Sulphone Ester

2494-89-5 0.0 15.75 15.75

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 4.50 4.50 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 4.50 4.50 Gamma Acid 90-51-7 0.0 15.75 15.75 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 6.75 6.75 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 6.75 6.75 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 4.50 4.50 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 22.50 22.50

Reactive Orange WNN

Sulpho Vinyl Sulphone

3039-83-6 0.0 21.83 21.83

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 17.78 17.78 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 7.65 7.65 J-Acid 87-02-5 0.0 11.25 11.25 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 1.80 1.80 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 14.85 14.85 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 6.75 6.75

Reactive Orange CD

Orthaniline Acid 88-21-1 0.0 6.75 6.75 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 6.75 6.75 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 6.75 6.75 3,5-Diaminobenzoic acid

535-87-5 0.0 6.75 6.75

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 4.50 4.50 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 20.25 20.25 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 9.00 9.00

Reactive Orange HER

J-Acid 87-02-5 0.0 9.00 9.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 12.60 12.60 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 8.33 8.33 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 11.25 11.25 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 4.50 4.50 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 2.70 2.70 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 4.05 4.05 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 33.75 33.75 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 18.00 18.00 BenzedineDisulphonic Acid

117-61-3 0.0 18.00 18.00

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 3.15 3.15 104 REACTIVE RED

Reactive Red CD Sulpho Vinyl Sulphone

3039-83-6 0.0 54.00 54.00

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 48.00 48.00 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 19.50 19.50


Project Description


J-Acid 87-02-5 0.0 30.75 30.75 Sodium Hydroxide 1310-73-2 0.0 6.00 6.00 Para Cresidine Vinyl sulphone Ester

21635-69-8 0.0 33.00 33.00

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 13.50 13.50 Reactive Red 5BX Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 20.44 20.44

H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 32.70 32.70 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 5.85 5.85 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 66.00 66.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 13.20 13.20 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 7.80 7.80 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 48.15 48.15

Reactive Red 3GX Meta PhenyleneDiamineSulphonic Acid

88-63-1 0.0 27.00 27.00

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 27.00 27.00 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 42.00 42.00 Meta Base Vinyl Sulphone Ester

2494-88-4 0.0 40.50 40.50

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 42.00 42.00 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 11.70 11.70 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 46.50 46.50 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 10.80 10.80 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 30.00 30.00 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 15.00 15.00

Reactive Red 3BX Para Base Vinyl Sulphone Ester

2494-89-5 0.0 31.80 31.80

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 20.40 20.40 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 43.65 43.65 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 35.10 35.10 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 3.00 3.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 0.90 0.90 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 7.80 7.80 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 5.40 5.40

Reactive Red Crimpson HEXL

H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 51.00 51.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 57.00 57.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 48.75 48.75 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 67.50 67.50 Acetic Anhydride* 108-24-7 0.0 22.50 22.50 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 48.75 48.75 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 64.50 64.50 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 11.25 11.25 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 19.50 19.50 MBA -- 0.0 7.50 7.50

Reactive Red Rubin XL

H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 52.50 52.50 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 105.00 105.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 3.75 3.75


Project Description


Maleic Anhydride* 108-31-6 0.0 30.00 30.00 Tobias Acid 81-16-3 0.0 33.75 33.75 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 67.50 67.50 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 10.50 10.50 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 30.00 30.00

Reactive Red BS H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 33.60 33.60 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 12.00 12.00 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 10.05 10.05 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 30.00 30.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 12.60 12.60 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 7.50 7.50 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 10.50 10.50 Sodium Acetate 127-09-3 0.0 6.75 6.75

Reactive Red RB Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 24.00 24.00 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 41.25 41.25 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 29.25 29.25 Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 36.00 36.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 11.25 11.25 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 9.00 9.00 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 30.00 30.00 Metanilic Acid 121-47-1 0.0 21.00 21.00 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 15.00 15.00

Reactive Red 2GX Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 24.00 24.00 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 45.00 45.00 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 6.00 6.00 Orthaniline Acid 88-21-1 0.0 21.75 21.75 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 18.00 18.00 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 9.00 9.00 Para Base Vinyl Sulphone Ester

2494-89-5 0.0 39.00 39.00

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 44.25 44.25 Reactive Red CAR J-Acid 87-02-5 0.0 32.25 32.25

Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 5.25 5.25 ORP -- 0.0 18.75 18.75 Sulpho Vinyl Sulphone

3039-83-6 0.0 48.00 48.00

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 39.75 39.75 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 18.00 18.00 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 45.00 45.00 Ortho Anisidine Vinyl Sulphone Ester

26672-22-0 0.0 42.75 42.75

105 REACTIVE BLUE Reactive Navy Blue RGB 100

Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 16.88 16.88 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 7.88 7.88 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 19.13 19.13 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 18.00 18.00 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 2.25 2.25


Project Description


Ortho Anisidine Vinyl Sulphone Ester

26672-22-0 0.0 16.88 16.88

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 9.38 9.38 Reactive Navy Blue GG

Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 19.50 19.50 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 19.13 19.13 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 9.00 9.00 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 20.63 20.63 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 3.38 3.38 Vinyl Sulphone Ester of 2:5 Dimethoxy Aniline

26672-24-2 0.0 21.75 21.75

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 14.63 14.63 Reactive Blue BB SOAVS -- 0.0 26.25 26.25

Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 33.75 33.75 4-Sulfo Hydrazone 118969-29-2 0.0 22.80 22.80 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 4.95 4.95 Copper Sulphate 7758-98-7 0.0 36.00 36.00 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 15.00 15.00

Reactive Blue 3GX

Vinyl Sulphone 77-77-0 0.0 15.00 15.00 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 20.25 20.25 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 9.75 9.75 Meta PhenyleneDiamineSulphonic Acid

88-63-1 0.0 9.75 9.75

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 12.75 12.75 Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.0 10.13 10.13 H-Acid 90-20-0 0.0 15.00 15.00 Sodium Acetate 127-09-3 0.0 9.00 9.00 Sulpho Tobias Acid 171570-11-9 0.0 14.25 14.25

Reactive Blue BRX

6-acetyle-2, 3, 4, 5-tetra hydropyridine

25343-57-1 0.0 15.75 15.75

Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 41.25 41.25 4-Sulphohydrazine 118969-29-2 0.0 19.50 19.50 Sodium Bicarbonate 144-55-8 0.0 15.00 15.00 Copper Sulphate 0.0 15.00 15.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 33.75 33.75 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 11.25 11.25 NEPBVS 0.0 18.75 18.75 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 16.50 16.50 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 33.75 33.75

Reactive Blue HEGN

Aniline 2, 4 Disulfonic Acid

137-51-9 0.0 81.38 81.38

Aniline 2, 5 Disulfonic Acid

24605-36-5 0.0 4.50 4.50

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 41.25 41.25 Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 37.50 37.50 Blue Base -- 0.0 62.25 62.25


Project Description


Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 9.38 9.38 106 Optical

Brightening Agent – 2B

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 2.99 2.99 Metanilic Acid -- 0.0 2.85 2.85 DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 2.77 2.77

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 3.14 3.14 Diethanol Amine 111-42-2 0.0 1.99 1.99 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 2.55 2.55 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 6.57 6.57

107 Optical Brightening Agent – BSU

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 9.00 9.00 Aniline 2, 5 Disulfonic Acid

24605-36-5 0.0 12.00 12.00

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 3.60 3.60 DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 8.10 8.10

Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 1.80 1.80 Diethanol Amine 111-42-2 0.0 5.40 5.40 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 6.00 6.00

108 Optical Brightening Agent – DMX

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 100.00 100.00 DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 100.00 100.00

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 25.00 25.00 Aniline* 62-53-3 0.0 50.00 50.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 25.00 25.00 Morpholine* 110-91-8 0.0 50.00 50.00 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 25.00 25.00

109 Optical Brightening Agent – BBU

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 10.85 10.85 Sulphuric Acid* 7664-93-9 0.0 7.00 7.00 Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 9.45 9.45 DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 10.50 10.50

Diethanol Amine 111-42-2 0.0 7.00 7.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 4.20 4.20 Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 0.0 7.00 7.00

110 Optical Brightening Agent – BA

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 16.64 16.64 DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 15.96 15.96

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 5.00 5.00 Aniline* 62-53-3 0.0 7.76 7.76 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 8.00 8.00 Diethanol Amine 111-42-2 0.0 10.64 10.64

111 Optical Brightening Agent – 4BB

Cynuric Chloride 108-77-0 0.0 90.00 90.00

DiaminoStillbeneDisulfonic Acid

81-11-8 0.0 87.75 87.75

Soda Ash 497-19-8 0.0 27.00 27.00 Aniline* 62-53-3 0.0 45.00 45.00 Caustic Flakes* 1310-73-2 0.0 67.50 67.50


Project Description


Monoethanol Amine 141-43-5 0.0 31.50 31.50 Salt 7647-14-5 0.0 45.00 45.00

112 Optical Brightening Agent – DT

BisChloro Methyl Biphenyl

1667-10-3 0.0 7.06 7.06

Benzaldehyde 2 Sulphonic Acid

1008-72-6 0.0 10.70 10.70

TrimethylPhosphite 121-45-9 0.0 10.20 10.20 Dimethyl Sulfoxide 67-68-5 0.0 13.70 13.70 Acetic Acid* 64-19-7 0.0 1.20 1.20 Sodium Methoxide 124-41-4 0.0 3.84 3.84

* Hazardous Chemicals as per the Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemical (Amendment) Rules, 1989, 2000 and subsequent amendments.

Storage Details of raw materials are attached as Annexure 2.4.

2.6.1 Raw Material Sources The required raw materials will be purchased from local supplies and/import depends on availability and market value.

2.7 Mode of Transportation of Raw Materials and Products

The required raw materials for the manufacturing of proposed products would be transported by road andrail/sea/air-ways. Similarly, in case of products it would also be transported by road and rail/sea/air-ways depending on need and location of customers. All the required statutory safety precautionary measures will be taken during handling and transportation of the materials.

2.8 Manufacturing Process Details

Details of manufacturing process, chemical reaction and mass balance of each product are givenin Annexure- 2.1

2.9 Water and Wastewater Details

Water is being supplied by GIDC and will be continued after this expansion. Details of water requirement and wastewater generation are presented Table 2-4and Table 2-5respectively.Total water balance diagaram is given inFigure 2-5.

GIDC letter regarding additional water requirement and treated wastewater discharge is attached as Annexure- 2.3.


Project Description


Table 2-4: Water Consumption Details

*After proposed expansion entire washing requirement will be met by recycled water

Table 2-5: Wastewater Generation Details

2.9.1 Wastewater Characteristics for Various Stage/Steps (Operation Phase)

• STREAM-1 - Process effluent (123 KL/day) –to be treated through Chlorination with Primary & secondary treatment - CETP Discharge

Effluent Parameters (mg/l)

PH COD BOD TDS SS Untreated 6.0-8.0 4500-5000 1800-2000 16000-18000 350-400 After Chlorination 7.5-8.5 2500-2800 1100-1300 13500-14500 200-250 After Primary & secondary treatment 7.5-8.5 1100-1300 400-500 11200-11700 100-150 CETP inlet Norms 6.5-8.5 3000 1200 --- 300

Sr. No.

Description

Water Consumption (KL/day)


Fresh Recycled

Water Fresh

Recycled Water

A Domestic 10 3 7 13 7

B Industrial 1. Process 46 204 20 250 20

2. Boiler 45 12 38 57 38

3. Cooling (make-up) 10 (-4) 14 6 14

4. Washing 40 (-40) 80 0* 80

Total (B) 141 172 152 313 152

C Gardening -- 13 7 13 7

Total (A+B+C) 151 188 166 339 166

Sr. No.

Description

Wastewater Generation (KL/day)

Mode of Disposal


A Domestic 7 7 14 Treated in STP

B Industrial

1. Process 35 108 143 Treated in MEE/ETP

2. Boiler 38 (Blow-down) 3 41 Pass through RO

System 3. Cooling 10 (Purge) 2 12

4. Washing 40 40 80

5. Reject of RO + Nutch Filter -- 30 30 Treated in MEE

Total (B) 123 183 306 --

C Gardening -- -- -- --

Total (A+B+C) 130 190 320 --

PC-16

Typewritten Text


Project Description


• STREAM-2 Utilities & washing water (133 KL/day) –to be treated in RO for REUSE


PH COD BOD TDS SS Before RO 7.5-8.5 700-850 300-350 2500-3500 80-100 After RO. (Permeate for Reuse) 7.5-8.5 200-250 60-70 650-750 BDL

• STREAM-3 MEE feed (50 KL/day) –

(High COD process effluent (20 KL/day) + RO reject (29 KL/day)+Nutch filtrate (1 KL/day)


PH COD BOD TDS SS High COD process stream 7.0-8.0 18000-20000 3000-3500 33000-35000 400-500 R.O. reject+ Nutch filtrate 7.5-8.5 3000-3500 1200-1350 11000-11500 BDL MEE condensate (for Reuse) 7.5-8.5 250-350 100-150 600-650 BDL


Project Description


Figure 2-5: Water Balance Diagrams

WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

(EXISTING)

SSeeppttiicc ttaannkk //

SSooaakk ppiitt ssyysstteemm

77

TToottaall WWaatteerr CCoonnssuummppttiioonn

115511

CCEETTPP VVaattvvaa

112233

77

WWaasshhiinngg 4400

CCoooolliinngg 1100

BBooiilleerr 4455

PPrroocceessss 4466

4400 1100

((PPuurrggee)) 3388

((BBllooww--ddoowwnn)) 3355

EEfffflluueenntt TTrreeaattmmeenntt PPllaanntt

112233

All the numeric values are in KL/Day

IInndduussttrriiaall

114411 DDoommeessttiicc

1100


Project Description


WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM (Existing + Proposed)

Details of recycling after 1st

Description

day

Qty. Remarks Description Qty. Remarks Description Qty. Remarks Total Effluent Recycled

Condensate of MEE

20 Used for Process Permeate of RO 80 Used for washing Permeate of RO 14 Used in cooling 166

28 Used in boiler 10 Used in boiler STP Treated Water 14 Used in Flushing & Gardening

All the numeric values are in KL/Day

CC oonn d

d eenn s

s aatt ee

RRee cc

yy ccll ee

:: 4488

TToottaall WWaatteerr CCoonnssuummppttiioonn

11sstt ddaayy:: 550055

22nndd ddaayy:: 333399

EEfffflluueenntt TTrreeaattmmeenntt PPllaanntt 112233

IInndduussttrriiaall,, 11sstt ddaayy:: 446655

22nndd ddaayy:: 331133 GGaarrddeenniinngg

2200

PPrroocceessss

227700

CCoooolliinngg

2200 BBooiilleerr

9955 WWaasshhiinngg

8800

1122

((PPuurrggee)) 4411

((BBllooww--ddoowwnn)) 8800 114433

SSTTPP

1144

1144

DDoommeessttiicc

2200

MMEEEE

5500

SSoolliiddss ttoo TTSSDDFF SSiittee

CCEETTPP VVaattvvaa 112233

11

RROO PPeerrmmeeaattee

:: 110044

110044 112233

FFiilltteerr

NNuuttcchh

77

77

8800 1100 1144

RROO RReejjeecctt:: 2299

2288

RROO

113333 11

2200

22

2200

TTrreeaatteedd

ww//ww ffrroomm

SSTTPP:: 77


Project Description


Table 2-6 Justification of ETP sludge Quantity (140 MT/Month)

• Justification of MEE Residue Quantity (30 MT/Month)

High-COD/TDS Effluent RO Reject + Filter nutch Filters

MEE Condensate

Parameter Conc.mg/l KL/day Kg/day Conc.mg/l KL/day Kg/day Conc.mg/l KL/day Kg/day TDS 34000

20 680 11250

30 338 625

48 30

SS 450 9 BDL 0 BDL 0 Total Solid 689 Total Solid 338 Total Solid 30

Input (Kg/day) Output (Kg/day) Solid in Process Effluent 689

MEE Solid in condensate 30

Solid in R.O. Reject + Filtrate 338 MEE Residue 997 Total 1027 Total 1027 ≈ 1 MT/day

2.10 Effluent Management System

Industrial Wastewater and Domestic Wastewater:

Domestic Effluent:

The domestic wastewater generated will be treated in proposed Sewage Treatment Plant, treated domestic wastewater will be used in flushing, and remaining will be utilized in gardening purposes.

Industrial Effluent:

The industrial process wastewater will be segregated into two into two into two OBA-DT stream and remaining process stream

High COD Process stream along with RO reject and Nutch Filter reject will be treated in Multiple Effect Evaporator (MEE). Concentrated slurry from MEE will be filtered in filter nutch and filtrate will be taken back to MEE. Condensate will be recycled in process and boiler operation.

Whereas Low COD process stream will be first treated through chlorination, stage (to reduce COD load) followed by ETP having primary & secondary treatment unitsbefore its discharge to CETP vatva for further treatment.

Cooling purge, boiler blow-down and washing stream will be treated in RO plant. RO reject will be treated in MEE while permeate from said RO will be recycled in washing, boiler, cooling and domestic activity. Sludge generated from ETP along with MEE salt will be sent to TSDF site.

Effluent Stream

Effluent Quantity (KL/day)

Chemical consumption

in Primary Treatment

(Kg/KL)

SS removal from

effluent (Kg/KL)

Total primary sludge

(MT/day)

Total secondary

sludge (MT/day)

Total ETP sludge

(Dry Basis) (MT/day)

Total ETP sludge

(Dry Basis) (MT/Month)

Total ETP sludge

(Wet Basis @30-35 % Moisture)

(MT/Month) Process water

123 21.5 0.5 2.7 0.05 2.75 82.5 111.4

Utility & Washing

133 5 0.2 0.7 0 0.7 21 28.3

TOTAL 3.4 0.05 3.45 103.5 139.7 (≈ 140)


Project Description


Additional COD/BOD destruction by Chlorination:

This methodology will reduce any higher BOD/COD load that may be generated.

Due to chlorination, process COD of approximately 12000 ppm will reduced to 3000 ppm and will therefore made the 3000-ppm effluent amenable to biological treatment.

The equipment consists of:

• A Chlorine tonner, which will used to provide Chlorine to the ventury of the Chlorine treatment tank. The stated Chlorine tonner will keep under a FRP safety hood.

• Barometric height will be provided to the Chlorine inlet pipe that will go to the Chlorine treatment tank.

• The Chlorine header will be divided into four pipes, each of which goes to the Chlorine treatment tank in pairs to the two numbers of Chlorine treatment tanks.

• Chlorine will enter the ventury placed in the above stated two tanks (two venturies per tank).

• The process will be carried out in batches with each batch consisting of three times Chlorination of the stated batch.

• Calcium Hydroxide solution will be prepared in a 10000 litre capacity tank by mixing through a pump and simultaneous addition of Chlorine through a two inch size PPE mixer for mixing of the Chlorine.

• pH of the mass in the Chlorination treatment tank will be raised to a pH of approximately 9.5, Chlorine dosing will be begun till the tank contents pH falls down to 7.5.

• Further Calcium Hydroxide solution will be added again to bring up the pH to approximately 9.5. This will be again followed by Chlorination till the tank contents show a pH of 7.5.

The above stated process will be carried out one more time by which the destruction of the COD will be optimum and the final COD of the Chlorine treatment tank will come down to about 3000 ppm.

Two Chlorine treatment tanks will be provided to carry out the stated process one by one in each Chlorine treatment tank.

DETAILS OF SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT :

• Design Flow : 15 m3/day

• Operating Hour: 20

• Max. Flow rate : 0.75 m3/day

Quality of Raw & Treated Sewage:

Sr. no. Parameter Characteristic Inlet Outlet

1 BOD 250-300 Less than 10 mg/L 2 COD 350-400 Less than 50 mg/L 3 TSS 150-200 Less than 20 mg/L 4 pH 6.5-8.5 6.5-9.5 5 Ammonical Nitrogen Less than 15 mg/L Less than 5 mg/L 6 Total Nitrogen Less than 10 mg/L Less than 10 mg/L 7 Fecal Coliform -- Less than 100 MPN/100 ml


Project Description


Details of Treatment Unit (STP):

Sr no. Name Dimension /Capacity 1 Screen chamber 0.5 mt x 0.5 mt x 0.5 mt 2 Oil & Grease trap 0.5 mt x 0.5 mt x 1.0 mt 3 Collection cum equalization tank 15 m3 4 Primary tube settler 1.0 mt x 1.0 mt x (1.25 mt + 0.6 mt cone) 5 MBBR Reactor/Aeration tank 2.0 mt x 2.0 mt x 1.8 mt 6 Secondary tube settler 1.0 mt x 1.0 mt x (1.25 mt + 0.6 mt cone) 7 Holding tank 2 m3 8 Pressure sand Filter 1 m3/hour 9 Activated Carbon filter 1 m3/hour 10 Hypo Dosing System 0.15 m3 11 Sludge Drying bed (2 nos.) 1.0 mt x 1.0 mt x 1.0 mt

Technical Specification of Multiple Effect Evaporators

Feed Rate 2500 Kg/Hr Feed Temperature 30° C Evaporation Rate 2375 Kg/Hr Concentrate Output Rate 125 Kg/Hr Steam Pressure 6 Kg/cm² Pressure Steam Consumption 730 Kg/hr Vacuum In First Calandria 110 – 225 mm Hg Temperature In First Calandria 110° C Vacuum In Second Calandria 225 – 475 mm Hg Temperature In Second Calandria 80 – 85 °C Vacuum In Third Calandria 475 – 610 mm Hg Temperature In Third Calandria 60 – 65° C

Technical Specifications of Reverse Osmosis

R.O. Membranes 8 nos. Raw Water Pump 10 m3/hr @2.5kg High Pressure Pump 10 m3/hr @25 kg Pump Vertical Pump Bag Filter Housing 1 lot. As per required flow M. Cartridge Filter with SShousing

1 lot. As per required flow

No. of Pressure Vessels 2 nos. Size of Pressure Vessel 8”dia. to house 4 membranes Flanges SS316, #1501 Control Valve 2 no. 2.0” Globe valve, SS316 Rotameter 2 no. Glass Tube Pressure Gauges 6 nos. Glycerineflled, 4” dial SSbody High Pressure Cut-off Switch 1 no. INDFOSS make Control &InstrumentPanel 1 no. M.S. to house starters,switches& relays Skid SS Piping-Fitting SS316


Project Description


Figure 2-6: Schematic Flow Diagram of ETP

PC-16

Typewritten Text


Project Description


Economic & Technical Viability of Effluent Treatment:

(A) Treatment cost of effluent generated from Plant

1. ETP treatment cost (Including Chlorination treatment) –

Total Effluent to be treated in ETP (stream-1) = 123 KL/day

Considering avg. cost of ETP operation= Rs. 40/KL

Total ETP Cost (A) = 4920 Rs. /day =Rs. 1, 47,600/Month

2. Operating cost of R.O. –

Total Effluent to be treated through RO (stream-2) =133 KL/day

Considering avg. cost = Rs. 15/KL

Total cost of R.O. (B) = 1995 Rs. /Day = Rs. 59,850 /Month

3. MEE evaporation cost –

Total Effluent to be treated in MEE (Stream-3) = 50 KL/day Considering avg. cost of MEE operation= Rs. 1000/KL

Total cost of MEE (C) = 50,000 Rs. /Day = Rs. 15,00,000 /Month

Total cost of wastewater treatment D= (A+B+C) = Rs. 17,07,450 / Month

(B) Savings of water reused per day

Savings of water reused = 152 KLD x Rs. 20/KL = Rs. 3040 /day

Savings of water reused = Rs. 91200 /month

Overall effective cost of advanced wastewater treatment and product recovery from waste will be

Efective Cost of W/W treatment: 17,07,450 –91200 = Rs. 16,16,250/month

Production Capacity= 1725 MT/month

Effective Cost of W/W treatment per Kg of Product= 1616250/1725000= Rs. 0.94 /Kg of Product which is

nominal additional cost for such activity & unit is ready to bear this amount.


Project Description


2.11 Power, Fuel Consumption and Expected Emissions

Power consumption details for the project activity are given in Table 2‐6 and details of fuel consumption and air emission and Air Pollution Control Measures (APCM) are presented in Table 2‐7.

Table 2‐6: Details of source and power consumption

Sr. No. Source of Power Quantity


1. Torrent Power Ltd. 400 KW 600 KW 1000 KW

2. D.G. Set 1000 KVA ‐‐ 1000 KVA

Table 2‐7: Details of fuel, air emissions and APCM

Flue gas emission stack:

Sr. No.

Stack attached to

Type of fuel and

consumption

Height of stack from ground level (m)

Internal diameter of stack (m)

Expected emission

Air pollution control

equipment

Existing

1. Steam Boiler (2 TPH) Natural Gas

(390 m3/hr)

33 0.5 SPM<150 mg/Nm3

SO2 <100 ppm NOx<50 ppm

Not Applicable

2. D. G. Set (1000 KVA)*

11 0.15 Not Applicable

Proposed

3. Steam Boiler (4 MT/hr )

Imported Coal/ Agro waste (540 Kg/Hr)

40 0.5

SPM<150 mg/Nm3

SO2 <100 ppm NOx<50 ppm

Cyclone Separator & Bag

filter

4. Hot air Generator (20 Lac Kcal) (2 Nos.)


40 0.5

Cyclone Separator & Bag

filter

5. Hot air Generator (11 Lac Kcal)


35 0.45 Cyclone

Separator & Bag filter

Note: * For emergency power back –up only.

Process gaseous emissions stack / vents :

Sr. No.

Vent attached to Stack height

from G.L., meter Expected Pollutant

APCM

Existing

1. Spray Dryer (2 Nos.) 22 each PM<150 mg/Nm3

Cyclone Separator followed by Water Scrubber

Proposed

2. Spin Flash Dryer (PNG based‐ In Built HAG)

15 PM<150 mg/Nm3

Cyclone Separator followed by Bag Filter in closed system

3. Spin Flash Dryer (PNG based‐ In Built HAG)

15 Cyclone Separator followed by Bag Filter in closed system

4. Spray dryer (PNG based‐ In Built HAG)


5. Spray dryer (2 Nos.)

25 Cyclone Separator followed by two stage Water Scrubber

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text


Project Description


2.11.1 Fugitive Emissions

Specific instances of fugitive dust generation include dust blow down by wind from the stockpiles of solid material such as Coal, dust caused by vehicular traffic within the factory, dust leakage from conveyors, conveyor transfer points, silos, storage hoppers etc. The adequate control measures have been proposed by the unit, which are summarized under:

Table 2-8: Details of fugitive emissions

Source of fugitive emissions Type of probable fugitiveemissions

Proactive control measures to reduce the same

Material Unloading SPM Water is being sprayed to suppress the particle and control the fugitive emission.

Storage Yard SPM Air borne dust is generated in minor quantity from the material storage yard due to wind, though the storage yard will be properly covered.

Unit has adopted water sprinkling method in storage yard to suppress dust generation. The unit has also developed plantation around the storage yard to control the fugitive emission.

Continuous Sprinkling of water

Vehicular traffic within the factory

SPM, NOx CO, SO2, HC

Only PUC certified vehicle are being allowed to use. Water is being sprayed to suppress the particle and

control the fugitive emission.

From equipments leak valves, pump seals, flanges, compressors, sampling connections, open ended lines,

Different type of fumes/ gases / hot

vapours

Plugs, caps and blinds for open ended lines. Rupture discs and soft seals for pressure valves. Dual mechanical seals with Non-VOC barrier fluid/

degassing vent system. Closed loop sampling system Covering of all open surfaces wherever possible. Mechnaincal / turbo ventilation system in process

area

Losses via evaporation from sources such asopen surfaces, wastewater treatment plant

CO2 and different gases

Organic gaseous emissions (Odorous and toxic)

Odouros gaseous missions

Organic gaseous emissions (Odorous and toxic) be routed to activated carbon beds (adsorption)

Release from building ventilation system

CO2, particulate matters / dust

Air handling unit equipped with fine filters. Water sprinkling Other related measures will be taken as per EPA

guidelines for VOC fugitive emissions for chemicals industry.

To reduce fugitive emissions from the plants, proper Leak Detection and Repair (LDAR) Program will be adopted.

Any other nonpoint emission.

Particulate matters

2.12 Solvent Use and its recovery details

The unit will provide solvent recovery system/distillation for the recovery of solvent. The raw material/solvent will be recovered and reused back in manufacturing process. The solvent will be recovered through distillation process. The distillation is a process where because of difference in boiling point solvent will be recovered. Details of solvent recovery system/VOCs control system is depicted in below figure.


Project Description


Figure No. 2-7: Solvent Recovery System

Solvent will be only used in production of OBA-DT. Solvent recovery/distillation system to be adopted during processing consisting:

Reactor attached to primary condenser having chilled water circulation of 5°C followed by secondary condenser having chilled brine circulation of -5°C

This will ensure that they get max. 98% recovery of solvent. The company do not have separate solvent recovery unit within premises, all solvent distillation

is done during processing as a part of process. Recovered (distilled) solvents generated from the processing will be reused back in

manufacturing process.

2.13 Odor and Its Control

Odorous substances that are emitted from industrial sources include both inorganic and organic gases and particulate. Many odorous compounds result from biological activity or are present in emissions from chemical processes. Odor sources due to proposed project are presented in Table- 2.9.

Table 2-9: Detailsof Probable Odor Sources and Mitigation Measures

Probable Odor Source Mitigation Measures

Area sources might be unconfined like wastewater treatment plant, solid/

Ensuring that the operation will be carried out under the best management practices

Sr. No.

Name of Product

Name of Raw Materials/ Solvent

Raw Materials / SolventtobeUsed

Raw Materials/Solvent to be Recovered

(MT/Day) (MT/Day) (%)

1. OBA-DT DMSO 0.46 0.45 98


Project Description


Probable Odor Source Mitigation Measures

hazardous waste and material storage etc.

Nozzles/ sprayers /atomizers will be used so that it sprays ultra-fine particles of water or chemicals will be used along the boundary lines of area sources to suppress odors.

Point sources are confined emissions from vents, stack and exhausts (if any).

Wet scrubbing system will be provided to remove odor involve either absorption in a suitable solvent or chemical treatment with a suitable reagent. Hot, moist streams will be cooled before the contact with scrubbing solutions.

Green belts are used to form a surface capable of sorbing and forming sinks for odorous gases. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce their concentrations in the ambient air. (Please refer greenbelt development plan details).

Fugitive sources are like odor emissions from loading and unloading of raw material (low molecular weight and high vapor pressure) to storage tanks, from valves, compressors, pumps flanges etc.

Please refer Table- 2.8 for details of odor control from fugitive source.

Building sources might be due to process, body odor due to excess sweating etc.

Any other nonpoint emission.

Mechanical/process ventilation will be provided which will help in dispersion of odors generated from sweating from room after hard physical labor. Increasing cooling rate of hot vessel and removal of contaminants (gas, vapor and dust)

2.14 Solid / Hazardous Waste Details

Table 2-10: Solid/hazardous waste details

Sr. No.

Type of Waste Waste Category

Quantity per Month Mode of Disposal** Existing*

(a) Proposed

(b) Total (a+b)

1. ETP sludge

35.3 (Sch-I)

50 MT 90 MT 140 MT Will be collected, stored, transported and disposed at GPCB approved TSDF site.

2. MEE salt -- 30 MT 30 MT Will be collected, stored, transported and disposed at GPCB approved TSDF site.

3. Used oil 5.1 (Sch-I)

0.2 MT 0.3 MT 0.5 MT Will be collected, stored and disposed by selling it to registered recyclers/refiners.

4. Discarded Container/ liners/ Bags

33.1 (Sch-I)

8100 Nos. 10,000 Nos.

18,100 Nos.

Will be collected, stored and disposed by selling it to registered vendors.

5. Spent Ion Exchange resin

35.2 (Sch-I)

-- 8.4 Kgs 8.4 Kgs Will be collected, stored, transported and disposed at GPCB approved TSDF site.

Note: *Existing quantity as per CC&A / CTE granted by GPCB

**As per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2016

PC-16

Typewritten Text


Project Description


Other waste like E-Waste and Battery Waste (if any) will be managed as per E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016 and Batteries (Management and Handling) Amendment Rules, 2010 as well asMoEFCC Notification /CPCB guidelines.

2.15 Noise and Vibration

During various construction activities, noise will slightly increase due to the use of a variety of construction equipments. However, the effect of such noise would be temporary and negligible. Nevertheless, protective equipments will be given to the workers working in such conditions. The main sources of noise pollution during operation phase would be boiler, D.G. set, blowers, pumps and motors, cooling towers etc. All machineries and its accessories will be well designed and mounted/located with the flexible support or foundation to avoid the vibration noise. Adequate sound enclosures will be provided and proper maintenance as well as lubrication will be done to all the equipments and machineries generating high noise. Care will be taken to ensure that the noise level does not exceed 75 dB (A) during the Day time and 70 dB (A) during the Night time.

Personal protective equipments (PPE) like earplugs/earmuffs will be provided to all the workers working in such areas where noise level will be high. In addition to this a large green belt area will be developed around the premises which will help to reduce noise levels.

2.16 Greenbelt Development

The plant species identified for greenbelt development can be planted using pitting technique. Width of the green belt in the available land area may prove difficult for many industries to attain for oneor more reasons. Hence it can be decided to have green belt in places available around the industry (source oriented plantation) as well as around the nearby habituated area (receptors oriented plantation).

The choice of plants for green belt should include shrubs and trees. The intermixing of trees and shrubs should be such that the foliage area density in vertical is almost uniform.

The pit size has to be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm. Bigger pit size will be considered at marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling the pit should be mixed with well decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the rate of 2.5 kg (on dry weight basis) and 3.6 kg (on dry weight basis) for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm and 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size pits respectively. The filling of soil has to be completed at least 5-10 days before actual plantation. Healthy sapling of identified species should be planted in each pit with the commencement of monsoon. Provision for regular and liberal watering during the summer period during the commissioning stage of the plant will be arranged from the local available resources. After the proposed plant became operational, the authorities responsible for plantation will also make adequate measures for the protection of the saplings. Existing green belt area is 2650 m2 (0.65 acre) of total land area which is about 15.77%.

2.16.1 Exiting Green belt within the project premise

The vacant plots in the project premises are used for green belt development, mainly dominated by Eucalyptus sp., Leucaenaleucocephala, Ficusbenjamina, Furcraeafoetida, Cordiasebestena, Neriuminicum, Caesalpiniapulcherrima, Cassia javanica, Acacia leucophloeaThevetiaperuvianaManilkazapota, and Spathodeacampanulata.

Figure 2-8: Existing Green Belt


Project Description



Project Description


2.16.2 Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI)

Air pollution tolerance index (APTI) was calculated by analysing the biochemical parameters of leaf, namely pH, ascorbic acid (AA), relative water content (RWC) and total chlorophyll (TChl) by following standard procedure.

The air pollution tolerance index (APTI) values calculated for each plant species in different zones.

The APTI range was divided as four grades of air pollution tolerance referring to Liu et al. (2008) as tolerant (T or grade I), moderately tolerant (MT or grade II), intermediate (I or grade III), and sensitive (S).

The tolerance grades were defined as follows:

(1) Tolerant: APTI > mean APTI+SD (2) Moderately tolerant: mean APTI<APTI<mean APTI+SD (3) Intermediate: mean APTI-SD<APTI<mean APTI (4) Sensitive: APTI < mean APTI-SD

Based on the APTI value the plants were conveniently grouped as follows (Kalyani and Singaracharya, 1995).

APTI Value response Tolerant - 30 to 100, Intermediate - 29 to 17, Sensitive - 16 to 1 andVery sensitive - <1 Table 2-11 Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI) of the certain plant species based on available the published literature

Name of the plant Air Pollution Tolerance Index (APTI) APTI Value response Acacia Arabica 15 Sensitive Acacia melanoxylon 18.23 Intermediate Aeglemarmelos 12.43 Sensitive Ailanthus altissima 9.9 Sensitive Alstoniascholaris 6.6 Sensitive Albizzialebbeck 32, 32.5, Tolerant Allamandacathartica 8.90 Sensitive Annonasquamosa 10 Sensitive Artocarpusheterophyllus 10.49 Sensitive Azadirachtaindica 27.5,30.5 Intermediate Bauhinia variegata 10.13 Sensitive Bougainvillea spectabilis 20.97, 30 Intermediate Bombaxceiba 8.9 Sensitive Buteamonosperma 13.4 Sensitive Cassia fistula 28 Intermediate Carica papaya 14.12 Sensitive Caesalpiniapulcherrima 14.82-16.87 Intermediate Clatropisprocera 18.10, 15.70 Sensitive Calotropisgigantes 27 Sensitive Catharanthusroseus 12.27-14.12 Sensitive Dalbergialanceolaria 21.8 Intermediate Dalbergiasisso 10.8 Sensitive Delonixregia 13.99, 12.6 Sensitive Emblicaofficinalis 9.81 Sensitive Entrobiumsaman 16.57 Intermediate Eucalyptus spp 18.0 -18.9 Intermediate Ficusreligiosa 25.77, 18.15, 22.67 Intermediate Ficusbenghalensis 19.89,19 Intermediate Ficusvirens 8.8 Sensitive Hibiscus rosa-sinensis 9.50 Sensitive Lantana camera 7.6- 7.92 , Sensitive Largerstromeaindica 9.0 Sensitive Lawsoniainermis L. 11.1 -11.81 Sensitive


Project Description


Leucana leucocephala 19,14.38 Intermediate Mangifera indica 20.80, 21.92 Intermediate Michelia champaca 16.16 Sensitive Melia azedarach 19.61 Sensitive Manilkara zapota 6.66 Sensitive Moringa olifera 12 Sensitive Nerium indicum 18.94, 16.65 Intermediate Peltophorum pterocarpum 6.81-8.43 Sensitive Pithecellobium dulce 24 Intermediate Plumaria alba 7.90 Sensitive Polyalthia longifolia 6.57-10.22 Sensitive Pongamia pinnata 21.45 Intermediate Prosopis cinereria 7.49 Sensitive Punica granatum 9.66 Sensitive Spathodea campanulata 20.41, 9.92 Intermediate Tamarindus indica 19.72, Intermediate Tecoma stans 9.26 Sensitive Tectona grandis 12.43 Sensitive Terminalia catappa 9.52 Sensitive Thevetia peruviana 5.5 Sensitive Thespesia populnea 9.94 Sensitive

2.17 Recommended plants for green belt development

Greenbelts are an effective mode of control of air pollution, where green plants form a surface capable of absorbing air pollutants and forming a sink of pollutants. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce pollutant concentration in the ambient air. Often the adsorbed pollutants are incorporated in the metabolic pathway and the air is purified. Plants grown to function as pollution sink are collectively referred as greenbelts.

An important aspect of a greenbelt is that the plants are living organism with their varied tolerance limit towards the air pollutants. A green belt is effective as a pollutant sink only within the tolerance limit of constituent plants. Planting few, known pollutant sensitive species along with the tolerant species within a green belt however, do carry out an important function of indicator species

Apart from function as pollution sink, greenbelt would provide other benefit like aesthetic improvement of the area and providing suitable habitats for birds and animals.

WE WILL DEVELOP 40 % GREEN BELT WITHIN OUR PREMISES AND/OR OUTSIDE THE PREMISES DEVELOP THE TOTAL EXCESS OF 6720 M2.

Thus it is recommended to do the plantation in the vacant plots as well as along the boundary wall with suitable species, One of the suitable species recommended in this area is Buttonwood (Conocarpus erectus L.), an evergreen tree of the family Combretaceae, this is a widespread species of terrestrial mangrove along tropical and subtropical coasts of the Americas and West Africa, recently introduced in India as road side hedges and divider plantation. It grows as a shrub or small tree, it has been found to tolerate extreme desert heat where summer temperature upto h 47 oC and can grow in soil of very low fertility (Branney, 1989)

2.18 Rain Water Harvesting

No rainwater harvesting system is proposed so as to avoid any contaminants on line of roof or on the ground from going to subsoil acquifer.

2.19 Man Power Requirement

Total employment generation after proposed expansion would be approximately 135 during operation phase. Details of manpower requirement are as given in Table 2‐18.

Table 2‐12: Details of employment / manpower requirement


Project Description


Phase of project

Type of Employee

No. of employee


1st Shift 2nd Shift 3rd Shift 1st Shift 2nd Shift 3rd Shift

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

Construction Contractual ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 20 8 20 8 16 ‐ 56 16

Operational

Managerial

90 10 66 ‐ 50 ‐ 55 10 35 ‐ 35 ‐ 331 20 Skilled

Semi‐skilled

2.20 Socio Economic Development / Welfare Activities

The proposed expansion project will increase direct/indirect employment opportunity for local residents of surrounding area. Industry is also committed to make contribution to other social/cultural activities to be conducted in the area. Industry is committed to participate in various developmental activities including community welfare programme for overall improvement of the socio‐economic environment in the project area through its effective Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) / Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) programme.

Company has allocated fund/ budget of RS. 32 LAKHS (APPROXIMATELY 2% OF THE TOTAL PROJECT COST) FOR ACTIVITIES UNDER CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY (CER) IN WHICH 1% AS PER MOEFCC‐ OFICE MEMORANDUM (OM) DATED 1ST MAY 2018 AND AS PER THE MINISTRY’S OFFICE MEMORANDUM 31ST OCTOBER, 2019 REGARDING PROJECTS LOCATED IN CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA DOUBLE THE CER WILL BE ALLOCATED. The proposed financial and social benefits with special emphasis on the benefit to the local people under CER programme are summarized under Table 2‐12.

Table 2‐13: Details of budget allocated towards CSR activities

Activities* Budgetary cost (Rs.)*

Implementation schedule

1. Arrangement for the youth to train them as per their skill and to provide them technical knowledge.

4,00,000

2019‐2025

2. Creation of Facility of treated water source in to villages. 4,00,000

3. Building the village infrastructure like closed drainage and RCC roads.

4,00,000

4. Building toilets for the villagers with the help of government scheme.

4,00,000

5. Promotion of government Social welfare schemes amongst the villagers by establishing public information center.

1,00,000

6. To organize medical camp for the villagers weekly or monthly. 2,00,000

7. Meticulous scholarship to economical weaker section students.

2,00,000

8. Promotion modern techniques of farming amongst the farmers.

1,00,000

9. Building facility for the rain water harvesting to uplift ground water level with the active contribution of villagers.

10,00,000

Total 32,00,000

Note: *Hike in material cost over the years and demand could be more for the desired infrastructure for each year.


Project Description


2.21 Occupational Health and Safety

Company is committed towards the Health & Safety of workers and will be /has been provided a facility of pre-medical check-up of employees for detecting any kind of adverse effect on the health of employee due to the chemical or work place condition and providing opportunity to improve the working condition. Drinking water supply and proper sanitary facilities will be/has been made available by the project

proponent so that employees do not suffer from any health ailments. The workers exposed to higher noise level will be /has been provided with ear muffs/ ear plugs. Proper handling of the materials and the maintenance of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) will be /has

been followed to ensure safety within the plant area. Periodical training programme to inform the employees about their task, associated risk, and safe –

working practices will be /has been undertaken. A regular monitoring of the occupational Health and Safety will reduce the chances of accidents hence

all the records of job related accidents and illness will be /has been maintained as per the requirement of Gujarat Factory Act. Statutory conditions as prescribed in other applicable Act/Rules will be / has been taking into consideration by the company. Occupational health & safety management plan / mitigation measures are given in Section- 10.3 of Chapter- 10.

2.22 Cleaner Production

The cleaner production is a way or a tool to have sustainable development with initiative to have growth minimum disturbance to environment and human being. The approach to cleaner production is different from conventional method of end of pipe treatment.

Cleaner production approach is directly reduction at source. Cleaner production activities that will be adopted in the proposed unit are shown in Table 2-14.

Table 2-14: Focus Area on Cleaner Production Activity

Focus Area Probability of Incorporation of Cleaner Production Activity Process Vessels

Liquid raw materials will be charged by pumping and closed loops and dosing will be done by metering system to avoid fugitive emissions.

Double mechanical seals will be provided to the process vessels having agitator for reduction of fugitive emissions and leakages.

Storage Vessels

Storage tanks for products as well as raw materials will be fitted with appropriate control devices to avoid possible leakages.

Control of Reactants and Waterto be used

Dedicated blenders will be used for blending of various dyes. This will reduce the requirement of washing after each blending process.

A dedicated spray dryer will be used for spray drying of each dye and its use will be planned in a way that light yellow to medium yellow to deep yellow to darkest yellows (as well as other colours) are manufactured one subsequent to the other so as to avoid washing of the spray dryer.

The in-house ice manufacturing unit will be set-up. This will avoid the melt ice water that is generated when the ice is bought from outside. This in turn will drastically reduce the melt water that goes to the effluent treatment plant. On an average approximately 50% of ice bought from outside melts and forms water which goes to the effluent treatment plant.

For all future production and due to the fact that the future production is for export purposes; all raw materials will be obtained of the highest quality which in turn will improve the fastness and therefore eliminate the requirement of an R.O. plant which is at present required to increase the concentration of the liquid product before its spray drying.

The standardization process that is currently being carried out will be replaced by standardization in the liquid form itself (and not in the powder form). Due to this


Project Description


Focus Area Probability of Incorporation of Cleaner Production Activity standardize liquid dye will be spray dried directly without the spray dried product having to be blended thereafter. Blending avoid will reduce the washing water requirement.

The chilled ice water that is used during the process for cooling through the jacket of a vessel will be collected, stored and then used for making solutions of raw materials wherever necessary.

Fixed transfer pipe lines will be provided and loose pipes will be avoided for handling reactants.

Housekeeping

It would not be out of place to mention that we shall: Follow safe work procedures and the requirements of the law Keep work areas clean Keep aisles clear Keep exits and entrances clear Keep floors clean, dry and in good condition Stack and store items safely Use proper waste containers. Store all materials in approved, clearly labeled

containers in designated storage areas only Keep sprinklers and fire extinguishers clear Clean up spills and leaks off any type quickly and properly Keep lighting sources clean and clear Follow preventive and predictive maintenance Mark all pathways for movement of raw materials and personnel etc.

2.23 Energy Conservation

Table 2-15: Energy conservation activities

Focus area Energy conservation activities With respect to processing

Producing compressed air is expensive. Over time distribution systems will develop leaks that are often undetected for long periods. Losses can amount to 50% of compressor output. Therefore, regular repairing will be done to prevent leaks from pipes, glands, seals and gaskets which significantly reduced energy costs.

Compressed air is always more expensive to produce and should never be the first choice for unit operations requiring movement or power. Energy costs will be reduced by using alternative processes for mixing liquids and solids in tanks. Wherever possible reduce the use of compressed air by switching to higher efficiency electric motors fitted with Variable Speed Drives (VSDs).

High vacuum levels are seldom required for processes. Batch processing can cause severe swings in demand for steam, with substantial swings in boiler output, thus reducing boiler efficiency. Heat recovery is significantly reduced. Therefore examining and scheduling will improve the scope for heat recovery.

With respect to distillation

Fouled or plugged trays and operating outside design criteria can increase energy use. To reduce energy consumption periodical cleaning and maintenance of trays and heat exchanges will be improved.

Modern instrument systems can significantly reduce energy consumption, whilst maintaining column stability. On- stream analyzers will be considered for systems such as feed forward control and material balance controls.

With respect to evaporation

Pressures can be affected by loss of vacuum and line restrictions, including fouling. As pressure rises in the system, the boiling point of the solution rises and additional steam is used to maintain capacity. Correct designed pressure will be maintained to optimize thermal efficiency.

Feed-water composition will be checked is as concentrated as possible. The quantity of


Project Description


Focus area Energy conservation activities

water evaporated is the main factor affecting energy consumption. Up‐steam adjustments may give a higher feed concentration and result in lower energy use.

Check the system regularly for water leaks. If water enters the process side thermal efficiency will decrease. Possible sources of water include corroded heat exchangers, pump seals and leaking valves for water connections used to flush out and clean the system between batches.

Vapour recompression can significantly reduce energy costs, but requires a careful analysis of operating conditions including boiling point rise and requires steam temperatures and pressures.

With respect to drying

Drying is a major consumer of energy. Therefore monitoring of drying operations enables energy consumption will be assessed and possibly reduced.

Heat losses from dryers by radiation and convection will be minimized by improving the insulation of dryers will save energy costs.

Routine cleaning and maintenance programmes for the combustion system will improve efficiency and reduce energy costs.

Uses of batch drying could consider changing to a continuous drying process. Check if it is possible to use heat recovered from the dyer exhausts in the drying

process.

Others Gravity flow shall be preferred wherever possible to save pumping energy. Technically feasible, energy efficient equipments like motors, pumps, air conditioning

systems shall be selected to the maximum extent possible. Automatic switching system for lighting & water tank pumping. Provision of day light roof to utilize maximum natural light in the production plant

instead of electrical lighting. Energy conservation measures shall include use of electronic lighting system, use of

CFL tubes to minimize energy use, use of programmable timers for pumping system and lighting, water level controllers for water pumps, centralized cooling etc.

The energy audit shall be conducted at regular intervals and the recommendations of the audit report shall be implemented.

Energy efficient devices and appliances conforming to the Bureau of Energy Efficiency norms shall be installed.

2.23Project Implementation Schedule

Phase wise project implementation schedule with bar chart and timeframe, in terms of site development, infrastructure provisioin, EMS implementation is described and shown in Table 2‐15 and Figure 2‐6.

Table 2‐16: Project Implementation Schedule

S. No. Activity Finish

1 EC Approval July, 2020

2 Detailed Engineering October, 2020

3 Procurement and Delivery January , 2021

4 Construction at Site (Buildings, Mech., Piping, Elec., Inst etc.) April, 2021

5 Pre Commissioning May , 2021

6 CTO Approval May, 2021

7 Process Startup and Stabilization June, 2021

Figure 2‐9: Bar chart showing project implementation schedule

Pr

EIA reporPlot No.

Det

Procurem

Co

Pr

rocess Startup

rt for expansion in pr96, 97, 98, 99, 100,

EC Appr

tailed Enginee

ment and Deliv

onstruction at S

re Commission

CTO Appro

and Stabilizati

roduction capacity ofM 102 & 84, GIDC Pha

Dec‐19

oval

ring

very

Site …

ning

oval

ion

Comple

M/s. Meghmani Dyes aase-II, Vatva, Dist.-Ahm

Jun‐20

etion Da

nd Intermediates LLP medabad, Gujarat

Jan‐21

ate

Jul‐21

Project De

Completion

escription

n Date


Description of Environment


Chapter 3. Description ofthe Environment

3.1 Introduction

To assess environmental impacts from proposed project at a specific location it is essential to monitor the environment quality prevailing in the surrounding area prior to implementation of the proposed project. The environment status within the study area could be used for identification of significant environmental issues to be addressed in the impact assessment only. The impact from an existing industrial project on its surrounding environment are mainly regulated by the nature of the pollutants, their quantities discharged to the environment, existing environmental quality, assimilative capacity of the surrounding environment and topography/ terrain of the project site (its location) as well as surrounding area. In order to identify and establish the extent of likely impacts, it is essential to gather information on existing environmental quality with respect to various components of the environment.

3.2 Pollution Control Statutory Requirement

Air Quality Standards: NAAQ (National Ambient Air Quality) Standards are presented in Annexure‐ 3.1. Water Quality Standards: Standards prescribed by IS: 10500 for drinking water are presented in

Annexure‐ 3.2. Noise Quality Standards: National Ambient Noise Quality Standards are presented in Annexure‐3.3 and

damage risk criteria for hearing loss ‐OSHA is attached as Annexure‐ 3.4.

3.3 Scope of Baseline Data Collection

The meteorological, ambient air, noise,water, monitoring/sampling parameters are considred as per earlier Environmental Clearance, Consent to Operate granted to unit (project specific parameters) and TOR issued by MoEF & CC. The baseline environmental monitoring and analysis carried out by ‘Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd.’ (NABL accredited Environmental Laboratory).The methods used for sampling and analysis of Air, Water, Noise and Soil samples as per laboratory’s NABL scope.

Table 3‐1: Methodology adopted for collection of baseline data

Step‐ 1 - Demarcation of study area for baseline environmental monitoring (BEM)

Step‐ 2 - Selection of Environmental attributes and parameters - Meteorological, Air, Water, Noise, Soil Environment

Step‐ 3 - Defining the study period

Step‐ 4 - Selection of monitoring locations for sampling for each parameters based on TGM and MoEF guidelines

Step‐ 5 - Monitoring network design for measurements or samplings to be done during the study period

- Frequency and duration of monitoring - Methods to be adopted for monitoring/ sampling and analysis - Background information about monitoring locations - Equipment and infrastructure set‐up (M/s. Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd) - Monitoring team formulation and responsibilities (M/s. Anand Environmental Consultants

Pvt. Ltd a NABL approved laboratory)

3.4 Study Period

Summer season was taken as study period, representative month April to June 2019 was selected for monitoring of Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) at each station once in a week. Ground water, Surface water, Soil and Noise were monitored and analyzed for once during the period.




3.5 Study Area Map

To carry out survey for M/s. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP, eight locations including one location within the project site were selected. Study area map depicted in Figure3-1.

Figure 3-1: Map of study area

Table 3-2: Scope of baseline data collection

S.No. Environmental Attributes Description 1 Landuse 10 km buffer area from the project site as per the EIA requirements 2 Geology & Soils Once during study period 3 Geo-Hydrology Once during study period 3 Site specific Hourly

Meteorological data For the following parameters : • Wind speed (kmph), Wind direction (deg), Temperature (in deg C),

Relative humidity, Rainfall (mm) • Measured by AUTOMATIC WIND MONITORING SYSTEM, WITH

MICRO-CONTROLLER BASED DATA LOGGER MAKE- Vitual Electronics Company (GSM wireless communication based)

• Location: Near project site of M/s. Meghmani Dyes & Intrmediates, Vatva

3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

For the following parameters : • PM10, PM2.5, NOx, SO2

• Monitoring Duration : During Summer Season , CO, &VOC

• Monitoring Station : Total 8 locations within study area of 10 km including Project site

4 Ground Water sampling For ground water samples: Max. 6 sampling locations – During Summer Season Parameters : pH, TDS, TSS, Total Phosphates, COD, Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3), Total Hardness (as CaCO3), Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3), Magnesium (as CaCO3), Ca+2, Mg+2, Cl-1, SO4

-2, Fluoride, Sodium, Potassium, Copper, Lead, Iron, Zinc, Ammonical Nitrogen and Phenol.

5 Surface Water sampling For surface water samples: Max. 7 sampling locations – During Summer Seasonc Parameters : pH, TDS, TSS, Total Phosphates, COD, BOD, Total Alkalinity




S.No. Environmental Attributes Description (as CaCO3), Total Hardness (as CaCO3), Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3), Magnesium (Mg+2), Ca+2,Cl-1, SO4

-2, Fluoride, Sodium, Potassium, Copper, Lead, Iron, Zinc, Ammonical Nitrogen and Phenol.

6 Soil sampling For soil samples : Total 8 locations within study area of 10 km including project site Chemical analysis parameters:pH, Electictrical Conductivity, Sodium, Calcium, Available Nitrogen, Available Phosphorus,Potassium, Water holding capacity, Porosity, Cation Exchange Capacity, Total Iron, Total Boron.

7 Leq Noise level measurement readings

Max.8 samplinglocations– once duringthe period

8 Ecology & Biodiversity Once during study of terrestrial and aquatic life. 9 Socioeconomic Study Once during study period

10 Risk and Hazard Analysis Physical verification of site once during study period

3.6 Landuse

Remote sensing data provides reliable accurate baseline information for land use and land cover mapping.Remote sensing provides land resource data in the form of different bands of the electromagnetic spectrum. Availability of such a data in different bands makes it very useful for delineation of land use/land cover classes distinctly. Land use/land cover mapping both by visual interpretation and digital automated analysis is possible by satellite remote sensing techniques. The land use / land cover categories can be expanded or reduced to any degree and be made more responsive to the information the user needs. In order to secure uniformity for the whole country a master land use/land cover classification system developed by agencies like NRSC must be adopted for consideration. The classification system facilitates the planners and researchers to study the spatial difference and distinction between various lands types, from multi temporal satellite data.

3.6.1 Data Sets

Geocoded False Colour Composite scene of IRS-IC LISS III / LISS IV images along with Survey of India (SOI) Toposheets has been used. There are many other freely available datasets which has also been considered for the same purposes like Landsat TM maps available at USGS and Images from Google earth of particular year.The datasets used in project are categorized into primary and ancillary types. This is principally in recognition of the types of land use information each provides. Primary datasets (Satellite Image) are fundamental and essential components in the landuse mapping process and contain information mainly regarding landuse such as agriculture, Cultivated or uncultivated lands. Ancillary datasets contain useful information on smaller scale land use such as reserved forests, protected areas, urban and other types.

3.6.2 Study Area

The land use/land cover study carried out within 10 km radius of the proposed project of Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP in the Vatva GIDC area to assess the existing environmental scenario in the area. For the purpose of EIA studies, Project area of Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP was considered as the core zone and area outside the plant upto 10 km radius was considered as buffer zone. The Figure 3-3 shows the location of the project site.




Figure 3-2: Location of the project site

3.7 LAND ENVIRONMENT Studies on land environment play a very important role in identifying susceptible issues and taking appropriate action to uphold ecological equilibrium in the region. The main objective of this section is to provide a baseline status of the study area covering 10 km radius around the proposed project site so that temporal changes due to the proposed activities on the surroundings can be assessed in future.

3.7.1 Land Environment using Remote Sensing and GIS Application Remote sensing technology has emerged as a potent tool in providing reliable information on various natural resources at different levels of spatial details; it has played a vital role in effective mapping and periodic monitoring of natural resources including environment. Based on these applications, the land use and land cover studies refer to man’s activities on land, utilitarian in nature whereas land cover denotes the vegetation cover, water body cover and artificial constructions, etc. The Land use/land cover classification system standardized by Department of Space, for mapping, different agro-climatic zones are been adopted. The classification systems are as follows:

• Settlement:- it is defined as an of human habitation developed due to non-agricultural use and that which has a cover of building, transport, communication utilities in association with water, vegetation and vacant lands.

• Land with or without scrub: - They occupy (relatively) higher topography like uplands or high ground with or without scrub. These lands are generally prone to degradation or erosion. These exclude hilly and mountainous terrain.

• Agricultural Area &Fallow land: - It is described as agricultural lands which is taken up for cultivation, but is temporarily allowed to rest un-cropped for one or more seasons, but not less than one year. These lands are particularly those which are seen devoid of crops at the time when the imagery is taken of both seasons.

Location of the Project Site




• Forest:-It is described as forest, which comprises of thick and dense canopy of all trees, which predominantly remain green throughout the year. It includes both coniferous and tropical broad-lived evergreen trees. Semi- evergreen forest is a mixture of both deciduous and evergreen trees but the latter predominate.

• Water body: - Area persistently covered by water such as river and reservoir, lakes.

3.7.2 Land use of Study Area The land-use & land cover map of the 10 km radial study area from the periphery of project site has been prepared using Landsat 8 satellite having OLI (operational land imager) sensor, which has 30 m spatial resolution with reference to Google Earth data and the Bhuvan LULC map. In order to strengthen the baseline information on existing land use pattern, the following data covering approx. the proposed project site as well as the 10 km radius from the periphery of the project site i.e. 22.9664 N latitude and 72.6159 E longitude and elevation 48 meter above MSL are used. The project is located in Survey of India toposheet no. NF 43-5 while 10 km radius study area falls in toposheet nos. NF 43-5 and NF 43-1

The digital image processing was performed on ERDAS Imagine 2014 software system on high-configured computer. This software package is a collection of image processing functions necessary for pre-processing, rectification, band combination, filtering, statistics, classification, etc. Apart from contrast stretching, there are large numbers of image processing functions that can be performed on this station. Arc GIS map 10.4is used for final layout presentation. Table 3-3 Data Specification Used For Present Study

Satellite/ Image Sensor Scene-Spec Spatial resolution

Date of Acquisition

LANDSAT 8 OLI LC81490442018280LGN00 30 m 7th October 2018

SRTM SIR-C & X-SAR SRTM1N18E072V3 30 m Feb 2000

Objective The objectives of Land use studies are:

• To determine the present land use pattern as per EIA/EMP norms by MoEFCC.

• To determine the drainage pattern present in the study area.

Data Used: A. Remote sensing data

• LANDSAT 8 OLI Scene

B. Collateral Data

• Survey of India ToposheetNF 43-5 and NF 43-1 (1:250,000)

Methodology Salient features of the adopted methodology are given below:

• Acquisition of satellite imagery

• Acquisition of elevation data

• Preparation of base map.

• Data analysis using visual interpretation techniques

• Preparation of drainage map from Elevation data.

• Finalization of the map

• Digitization using head up Vectorization method




• Topology construction in GIS

• Area calculation for statistics generation

• Masking

The two important parameters for any satellite data is the spatial resolution of data and spectral bands in which sensor collects the data.LANDSAT 8 OLI data offers spatial resolution of 30 m with the swath width of 185 x 185 km. The data is collected in 4 visible bands namely green (Band 3) (0.533-0.590µ), red (Band 4) (0.636-0.673µ), near infrared (NIR) (Band 5) (0.851-0.879µ), short wave shortwave infrared (SWIR1) (Band 6) (1.566-1.651µ) with orbit repeat period of 16 days. The shapes, sizes, colours, tone and texture of several geomorphic features are visible in Landsat data.

Four spectral bands provide high degree of measurability through band combination including FCC generation, bands rationing, classification etc. These features of the Landsat data are particularity important for better comprehension and delineation of the land use classes. Hence, Landsat 8 OLI data has 15 m spatial resolution of pan chromatic bandbut have not used for the Land Use classification. The band rationing techniques with water indices and vegetation indices has been used to specifically demarcate the water bodies and the vegetation in the study area.

In addition, the supervised classification was used for all the spectral bands; they can separate fairly accurately, the different land use classes at level II on the basis of the spectral responses, which involve the following three steps:

1. Acquisition of training areas 2. Calculation of the statistics of training area 3. Classification using maximum likelihood algorithm

The training areas for classification were homogeneous, well spread throughout the scene with bordering pixels excluded in processing. Several training sets have been used through the scene for similar land use classes. After evaluating the statistical parameters of training sets, the training areas were rectified by deleting no congruous training sets and creating new ones.

3.7.3 Visual Interpretation of Satellite Data The False Colour Composite (FCC) of Landsat 8 OLI satellite imagery having 30 m spatial resolution satellite data at 1:50,000 scale was used for visual interpretation work. Taking the help of topo sheets, geology, geo-morphology and by using the image elements, the features were identified and delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature was identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use was formulated. The sample area for field check is selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image characteristics.

3.7.4 Land Use/Land Cover Classification Total five major land use/land cover classes were demarcated in the study area as shown in Figure 3.2.A thematic map of 1:50,000 scale was generated incorporating these classified categories considering the area of the project. As the classification done by the visual interpretation method and screen digitization of the Landsat 8 OLI imagery of 30m spatial resolution. In addition, the classification was done by the spectral indices and supervised classification also using ERDAS Imagine 2014 software.




The classification suggests that agricultural area or the urban vegetation occupies maximum amount of land in the 10 km buffer area. The vegetation coverage, which is present within settlement area, is called as urban vegetation. Figure 3-3 and Table 3-4 shows the map and percentage of the land use classes. The agricultural area/urban vegetation cover around 63.3% (19880 Ha) of area followed by settlements that covers around 29% (9206 Ha) area. The settlements cover second highest area in the 10km buffer. Whereas, the Industrial area, water bodies and barren areas covers 5.8% (1841.6 Ha), 1.12% (353 Ha) and 0.42% (133.47 Ha). From the LU/LC map and satellite data, settlements occupy a subsequent amount of area as the 10km radius covers half of the Ahmedabad Urban area. Maximum amount of settlements were seen in the Northern and the north western part of the study area, with presence of the Sabarmati river in the North. The industrial area is present near the project site and on the western and eastern part of the study area. There are scattered settlements found in the southern and southwestern part of the study area, which are few villages around the project site. It is also observed that the study area is well connected with NE-1, National highway and other state highways and the railway line.

Figure 3-3: Pie Chart distribution of LU/LC layers

Table 3-4: Details of land use / land cover

Landuse Area (Ha) Area (%)

Agricultural Areas / Urban Vegetation 19880.44 63.28

Industrial 1841.67 5.86

Settlements 9206.93 29.31

Water Bodies 352.99 1.12

Barren Areas 133.47 0.42

Land Use Layer & its coverage (%)




Figure 3-4: Landuse map of the study area

3.7.5 Topography

• Proposed project site is located at 21.45°N and 72.45°E. It has an average elevation of 16 metres above sea level. In general project site is located on plain barren land devoid of any permanent and economically useful vegetation.

• The topography of the proposed site for project is plain terrain. Forest, national park, eco sensitive area and wild life sanctuary is not located within 10 kms periphery of the proposed project site.

3.8 Geology and Soils

3.8.1 Physiography

Ahmedabad district forms a part of Gujarat Plain and is sub-divided into five sub micro regions, namely, Viramgam Plain, Sabarmati Basin, Khari Meshwo Plain, Bhadar BhogavoLow Land and Bhadar River Plain on the basis of topography, climate geology, soils and naturalvegetation.

The Earth surface of district is formed of alluvial clay. Though lime-stones are found inthe Deccan area of district. The land of the district is generally surfaced. The general slopetowards south-west of the district is also found. The mineral property of limestone is found inDhandhuka area of the district. Moreover, minerals like sand and gravel are found due toSabarmati River.

Some of the hills around Ninama, the most westerly part of Dhandhuka are coveredwith fragments of quartz and limestone. Some of the hills located at Vasai and Miroli in theSouthern Section of the district and also near Thaltej and Gota of Daskroi taluka in the northand Chandisar in Dholka taluka and Vastrapur in city taluka. There are no big mountains orhills in district. But there are small hills at Vasai and Miroli of Daskroi taluka and at Chandisarof Dholka taluka.

3.8.2 Geology

Ahmedabad district is situated in central Gujarat and lies between 22°0' and 23°35' North latitudes and 71°42' and 72°50' east longitudes. It is bounded in the north by Mahesana district and north-east




by the Gandhinagar district and south by the Kheda and Anand districts and the Gulf of Khambhat. The western side of the district is bounded by the Bhavnagar and Surendranagar districts.

The district as a whole forms a level plain gradually rising towards the north and the east. The district has no hills of any importance although a few small hills do obtain at Vasai and Miroli in the southern section of the district, near Thaltej and Gota on Daskroi taluka in the north and also at Chandisar in Dholka taluka.

There are 16 rivers in the district. Among them the Sabarmati is the principal river of this district and rest are small rivers.

The area is well connected by roads and rails; the area experiences about 625.8 mm average annual rainfall.

3.8.3 Soils

The soil quality of the area is not considerably fertile for agricultural activities. No evidence of any influence of contaminant has been noticed. In overall area, the agricultural productivity is very less due to the absence of fertilization practices & poor fertility of soil.There are mainly four main types of soils Ahmedabad district. These are Black Soils, Goradu Soils, Kyari, and Rocky soils.

The soil found in the study area categorised as Black soils are not very clayey and contains above 20% of clay and about 40 % of sand.Medium Black Soils are found in Viramgam, Sanand and Dholka talukas. Goradu soils vary from fertile brown to sandy loam. This soil is mostly fertile and responds very well to irrigation and manuring. Kyari soil is the most fertile soil with very good moisture and retentive capacity. Rocky soils are shallow, light in texture and fit for early maturing crops like cotton, Bajri, Jowar and Methi.

3.8.4 Geohydrology




3.8.5 Drainage:

River Sabarmati is the principle river of the district. It originates from Dhebar lake of Aravalli Range of Udaipur District, Rajasthan and finally debauches into Gulf of Khambhat near Vataman village of Dholka Taluka. Sabarmati forms the eastern boundary of the district flowing from NE to SW direction in Ahmedabad and Gandhinagar districts. The river Vatrak flows for a smaller length and joins Sabarmati near village Wauta of Dholka taluka. The Khari river and the Meshwo river drain Dascroi taluka. The river Bhogavo with its branches Chatori and Omkar drains Dholka and Dhandhuka talukas. The Bhadar River with its branch Goma, Lilka, Utavali and Ghela drains Dhandhuka taluka of the district. River Rodh drains Sanand and Dholka talukas. Rivers Shelwa and Andhli drain Dholka taluka. There is no river or rivulet in Viramgam taluka.

3.9 Meteorology

3.9.1 Primary Meteorological Data

For collection of site-specific meteorological data, weather monitoring station was setup at the main gate of the project site by “Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt Ltd. for Summer Season.The survey was undertaken as per IS: 8829-1978 and CPCB Guidelines. Automatic Weather Monitor System, with microcontroller based data logger was used to record parameters viz. temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, wind direction. The site specific hourly mean meteorological data is given in Table-3.5. Table 3-5: Site specific meteorological data

Parameters Summer Season Temperature (°C) Minimum 27.48

Maximum 46.31 Average 36

Relative Humidity (%) Minimum 18.77 Maximum 82.86 Average 53

Wind Speed (kmph) Minimum 1.5 Maximum 24 Average 11.41

Rainfall (mm) Minimum 0.0 Maximum

Average




3.9.2 Temperature The minimum and maximum hourly average temperatures recorded during summer season were 27.48°C and 46.31°C respectively. 3.9.3 Wind Speed and Wind Direction Maximum wind speed was 24 kmph while the average windspeed was 11.41 kmph during the summer season.

3.9.4 Wind Rose Diagram

Figure 3-5: Windrose diagrams of the study period

Wind Rose Diagram

Wind Rose on Google Earth Image




3.9.5 Secondary Meteorological Data

The data for secondary meteorological parameters namely humidity and rainfall have been taken from Climatological Tables of Observation in India 1951-1980 by India Meteorological Department (IMD). The presented data are for IMD station –Ahmedabad.

3.9.5.1 Relative Humidity and Vapour Pressure

Morning and evening mean monthly relative humidity (%) and vapour pressure (hPa) data for Ahmedabad station is given in the Table 3-6.

Table 3-6: Monthly data of relative humidity and vapour pressure

Month Relative Humidity (%) Vapour Pressure (hPa) Morning

(at 08:30 hr. IST) Evening

(at 17:30 hr. IST) Morning

(at 08:30 hr. IST) Evening

(at 17:30 hr.IST) January 57 29 9.4 9.8 February 50 22 9.8 9.5 March 46 18 12.6 9.6 April 51 18 18.4 12.2 May 63 22 25.6 25.9 June 74 45 30.2 25.7 July 85 67 31.1 30.2 August 88 70 30.1 29.7 September 83 59 28.5 26.8 October 64 37 20.8 18.7 November 53 33 13.6 14.4 December 57 33 10.9 12.1

Source: Climatological Tables of Observatories in India 1951-1980 by India Meteorological Department

The mean monthly average of Relative Humidity values for Ahmedabad station was recorded for 8:30 a.m. and 5:30 p.m. Based on above stated data it can be concluded that the Relative Humidity is generally high during the period from June to Sept.

The average relative humidity during summer season was 53 %.

3.9.5.2 Rainfall

The monthly average rainfall data of last 5 years (2014-2018) for Ahmedabad district, collected from India Meteorological Department (IMD) website are presented in Table 3-7.

Table 3-7: Average rainfall data of Ahmedabad district

Month Average Rainfall (mm) of Year 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018

January 1.5 2.0 0 0 0 February 0 0 0 0 0 March 0 6.2 1.3 0 0 April 5.1 4.8 0 0 0 May 1.5 2.0 0.2 0.2 0 June 5.3 115 8.1 88.3 13.1 July 364.6 206 129.1 490.9 128.1 August 108.1 24.5 196 100.1 128.4 September 203.2 55.2 49 52.0 16.3 October 0.1 0 52.4 0 0 November 8.7 0 0 0 0 December 0 0 0 3 0




Month Average Rainfall (mm) of Year 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018

Total 2712.1 2430.7 2452.1 2751.5 2303.9 Average 226.0 202.55 204.34 229.29 191.99

Source: Hydromet Division, India Meteorological Department, District Rainfall (mm)

Based on above stated data it can be concluded that rainy season in the Ahmedabad region extends from June to September and high rainfall is seen in the month of July to September.

3.9.5.3 Cloud Cover

Cloud amount is generally high during the period from June to September.

Table 3-8: Monthly data of cloud amount

Month

Cloud Amount (Oktas of sky) All clouds Low clouds

08:30hr. 17:30hr. 08:30hr. 17:30 hr. January 1.3 1.4 0.1 1.3 February 1.2 1.2 0.2 0.2 March 1.4 1.6 0.2 0.3 April 1.5 1.7 0.3 0.4 May 1.8 1.2 1.4 0.8 June 4.9 4.0 3.3 2.9 July 6.6 6.4 3.9 4.1 August 6.8 6.4 3.9 3.8 September 4.5 4.2 2.4 2.6 October 1.7 1.7 0.4 0.8 November 1.5 1.5 0.3 0.5 December 1.6 1.6 0.1 0.2

Annual total OR mean 2.9 2.7 1.4 1.4

Source: Climatological Tables of Observatories in India 1951–1980 by India Meteorological Department.

3.10 Air Environment

Following steps were taken for identification/preparation of monitoring network /station

1) Preparation of map of study area (10 km radius) 2) Preparation of dummy model of windrose from secondary data in order to identify the predominant

wind direction. 3) Identification of sensitive receptors (sensitive receptors falls under the downwind direction) by putting

the dummy model of wind rose on google map. 4) Setting–up monitoring location with the help IS standard 1582 (part 14) as well as District Census.

Based on the population of different areas, land use, pre-dominant wind direction, sensitive receptors and their distance and direction from the plant, EIGHT (8) locations, including one location within the project site, were selected for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) in the study area of 10 km radius. The details of ambient air qualitylocations are given inTable 3-9.




Table 3-9: Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations for the study

Sr. No.

Location Approx. aerial dist. from the site, km

Direction from

project site

Latitude Longitude Type of Area

Upwind or downwind w.r.t

predominant wind direction (NE-SW)

1. Vanch 5.49 115.91° 22°56'19.00"N 72°41'22.00"E Residential Cross-wind

2. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° 22°58'20.00"N 72°36'38.00"E Residential Cross-wind

3. Ramol 2.46 10.88° 22°58'55.00"N 72°38'45.00"E Residential Up-wind

4. Geratnagar 3.08 100.73° 22°57'18.00"N 72°40'15.00"E Residential Up-wind

5. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° 22°56'20.00"N 72°34'33.00"E Residential Down-wind

6. Geratpur 4.47 161.38° 22°55'19"N 72°39'19"E Residential Cross-wind

7. Anar Chmicals

0.80 273.05° 22°57'38.01"N 72°38'00.38"E Industrial Up-wind

8. Project site -- – 22°57'36.55"N 72°38'28.62"E Industrial --

I-R: Industrial- Residential, I: Industrial

3.10.1 Frequency and Period of Monitoring

24 hourly monitoring was carried out at the above-mentioned locations twice a week during summer season, photographs of sampling location attached asAnnexure-3.5;for the parameters given in Table-3.2. The monitoring was carried out in accordance with the guidelines of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), scientific manual of GPCB, and National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) of CPCB.

3.10.2 Testing Method for AAQ parameters

Results of Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) are given in Table-3.10.



Table 3-10: Results of ambient air quality (AAQ)

Parameter Value AAQ Monitoring Station NAAQS Stds. (24 hr Avg.)* Ghodasar

Laxmipura Ramol Vanch Geratpur Geratnagar Anar

ChemicalsProject

Site

PM10 in µg/m3

Min. 56 62 68 57 49 68 67 65

100 Max. 78 86 86 78 73 88 84 85 Avg. 68 75 75 67 64 75 73 73

98th Percentile 77 86 85 78 73 87 83 84

PM2.5 in µg/m3

Min. 22 23 32 28 26 27 31 30

60 Max. 44 39 52 40 39 42 44 43 Avg. 34 31 43 35 33 36 38 37

98th Percentile 44 39 52 40 39 42 44 43

SO2 in µg/m3

Min. 22 24 23 26 28 19 33 32

80 Max. 31 30 29 36 38 27 46 45 Avg. 27 27 26 31 32 23 38 39

98th Percentile 31 30 29 36 38 27 46 45

NOX in µg/m3

Min. 15 18 20 17 16 19 30 26

80 Max. 29 30 26 27 25 26 44 42

Avg. 21 24 23 22 21 23 37 35 98th Percentile 29 30 26 27 25 26 44 42

3.10.3 Baseline Status of Ambient Air Quality of Study Area

Baseline status of AAQ of the study area is presented in Table3-11.

Table 3-11 : Baseline status of ambient air quality

S.No. Parameters Baseline Status 1. Particulate Matter size

less than 10µm (PM10)

The main contribution to PM10 at all the AAQM locations was primarily due to local activities such as vehicular movement, agricultural activities and prevailing wind.

PM10 concentrations in the study area were ranging from 63 to 79 µg/m3 with 98th percentile values in the range of 72 to 87 µg/m3 which are within the stipulated NAAQS values.

2. Particulate Matter size less than 2.5 µm (PM2.5)

The main contribution to PM2.5 at all the AAQM locations was primarily due to local activities such as vehicular movement, natural dust and prevailing wind.

PM2.5 concentrations in the study area were ranging from 29 to 48 µg/m3 with 98th percentile values in the range of 38 to 52 µg/m3, which are within the stipulated NAAQS values.

3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

The range of SO2 was from 26 to 40µg/m3 with 98th percentile values in the range of 29 to 46 µg/m3 and within stipulated standards of NAAQS

4. Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

The range of NOx was from 21 to 37 µg/m3 with 98th percentile values in the range of 26 to 44 µg/m3 and within stipulated standards of NAAQS.




3.11 Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring

Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring (ANQM) in the study area has been measured at selected locations are given in Table 3-12.

Table 3-12 : Location of ambient noise monitoring

Sr. No. Location Approx. aerial dist.

from the site, km

Direction w.r.t

project site

Latitude Longitude Type of Area

Upwind or downwind

w.r.t predominant

wind direction (SW-NE)

1. Vanch 5.49 115.91° 22°56'19.00"N 72°41'22.00"E Residential Cross-wind 2. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° 22°58'20.00"N 72°36'38.00"E Residential Cross-wind 3. Ramol 2.46 10.88° 22°58'55.00"N 72°38'45.00"E Residential Up-wind 4. Geratnagar 3.08 100.73° 22°57'18.00"N 72°40'15.00"E Residential Up-wind 5. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° 22°56'20.00"N 72°34'33.00"E Residential Down-wind 6. Geratpur 4.47 161.38° 22°55'19"N 72°39'19"E Residential Cross-wind 7. Anar

Chmicals 0.80 273.05° 22°57'38.01"N 72°38'00.38"E Industrial Up-wind

8. Project site -- – 22°57'36.55"N 72°38'28.62"E Industrial -- I-R: Industrial- Residential, I: Industrial

3.11.1 Duration of Sampling & Methodology • The frequency of monitoring was set at an interval of 2 hours during 24 hours of one single day during

the study period. • Each measurement was taken for 15 seconds. All measurements were carried out when the wind speeds

were approximately 1-2 m/sec and no unusual activities were being carried out at the monitoring locations.

• The measurements were made using Sound Level Meter, Photographs showing sampling locations attached as Annexure-3.5.

• Equivalent sound levels or Equivalent continuous equal energy level (Leq) were then calculated from the recorded values separately for day-time as well as night time. Equivalent sound levels or Equivalent continuous equal energy level (Leq) is a statistical value of sound pressure level that can be equated to any fluctuating noise level and forms a useful measure of noise exposure and forms basis of several of the noise indices used presently. Leq is defined as the constant noise level, which over a given time, expands the same amount of energy, as is expanded by the fluctuating level over the same time. This value is expressed by the equation:

Leq = 10 log (1/n x Σ (10)Li/10)………………………………………………….eq. no.- 3.1

Where, n = Total number of sound samples, Li = the noise level of any ith

• Leq is used widely as a scale for the measurement of long term noise exposure.

sample

• The Leq values of noise levels are then compared with the stipulated standards of CPCB for residential and industrial areas within the impact zone.The ambient noise standards of CPCB are given as Annexure – 3.3 and Damage risk criteria for hearing loss given by occupational safety & health administration (OSHA) is enclosed as Annexure – 3.4.




3.11.2 Results of Ambient Noise Quality

• The calculated Leqs are tabulated as given in Table 3.13.

Table 3-13 : Noise levels at ambient air monitoring stations

Sr. No.

Location Approx. Aerial Dist. From the site, km

Direction w.r.t project site

Type of Area Noise Level (Leq) indBA (Day time)

(0600 to 2100 hrs.)

Noise Level (Leq) in dBA (Night time) (2100 to 0600 hrs.)

Measured Permissible limit

Measured Permissible limit

1. Vanch 5.49 115.91° Residential 40 55 33 45 2. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° Residential 50 55 37 45 3. Ramol 2.46 10.88° Residential 52 55 40 45 4. Geratnagar 3.08 100.73° Residential 51 55 39 45 5. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° Residential 43 55 35 45 6. Geratpur 4.47 161.38° Residential 40 55 32 45 7. Anar

Chmicals 0.80 273.05° Industrial 66 75 52 70

8. Project site -- – Industrial 62 75 56 70 I= Industrial, R=Residential

3.11.3 Baseline Status of Ambient Noise Quality The maximum noise level measured in the industrial area under the impact zone was 66 dBA at Anar Chemicals in daytime and 56 dBA in night time at project site, which were below the stipulated standards of CPCB. Noise levels of the residential area within the impact zone varied from 40-62 dBA during day time and 33-52dBA during night time, which are also below permissible limits as stipulated by CPCB.

3.12 Water Environment

Representative underground as well as surface water samples from different locations within a distance of 10 km radial distance from the project site were selected for sampling.

3.12.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

Surface waters from ponds, rivers within the study area were selected for sampling, ground water from borewells of given villages were selected for sampling. Please refer Table-3.14and Table-3.15for sampling locations. Photographs of water sampling are attached as Annexure-3.5.

Table 3-14 : Surface water sampling location

Sr. No. Sampling Locations Approx. Radial Distance From

Project Site, km

Direction w.r.t. Project

Site

Latitude Longitude

Surface Water (Pond Water, Reservoir,River) 1. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° 22°56'20.00"N 72°34'33.00"E 2. Ramol 2.46 10.88° 22°58'55.00"N 72°38'45.00"E 3. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° 22°58'20.00"N 72°36'38.00"E 4. Kankariya lake 6.43 318.95 23°0’15”N 72°35’58”E 5. Sabarmati river 8.63 302.55 23°2’34” N 72°34’29” E 6. Anar Chemicals 0.80 273.05° 22°57'38.01"N 72°38'00.38"E 7. Project Site -- -- 22°57'36.55"N 72°38'28.62"E




Table 3-15 3: Ground water sampling location

Sr. No. Sampling Locations Approx. Radial Distance From

Project Site, km

Direction w.r.t. Project

Site

Latitude Longitude

Ground Water ( Bore well waters of -) 1. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° 22°58'20.00"N 72°36'38.00"E 2. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° 22°56'20.00"N 72°34'33.00"E 3. Ramol 2.46 10.88° 22°58'55.00"N 72°38'45.00"E 4. Vanch 5.49 115.91° 22°56'19.00"N 72°41'22.00"E 5. Geratpur 4.47 161.38° 22°55'19"N 72°39'19"E 6. Geratnagar 3.08 100.73° 22°57'18.00"N 72°40'15.00"E

Note: There is no ground water source (Bore well) at project site.

3.12.2 Duration of Sampling and Method of Testing

Grab Samples were collected once during the study period. Physico-chemical and microbiological parameters relevant for different water uses have been analyzed to establish the baseline status of surface water and ground water resources in the study area. Methods as per IS and APHA were adopted for analysis of these parameters

The SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) for sampling prepared based on sampling protocol specified in the “Guidelines for Water Quality Management”.

• Quantity of sample for General Analysis: 2 liters (non-acidified). • Quantity of sample for Bacteriological Analysis: 250 ml in sterilized bottles. • Quantity of sample for Metals Analysis: 1000 ml acidified sample for metal analysis.

Samples were analyzed at the laboratory Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt Ltd as per STPs (Standard Testing Procedures) based on IS and APHA methods.

The results of pond waters are tabulated against CPCB tolerance limits for Class B - Outdoor bathing based on information provided by villagers regarding use. Bore well water results are also tabulated against CPCB tolerance limits forClass B - Outdoor bathing and other uses.

Surface and ground water quality is given in Table 3.16 to Table-3.19.




Table 3-16 4: Surface water quality Sr. No. Parameters Unit IS 2296 : 1982 Class B -

Outdoor BathingPermissible limit

Analysis Results of Pond water of:

Laxmipura Ramol Ghodasar Kankariya lake

1. pH - 6.5 - 8.5 8.73 8.23 8.03 8.79

2. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l NS 3808 968 416 1912

3. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l NS 55.14 47.96 7.34 31.64

4. Phosphates mg/l NS 2.87 4.58 0.36 4.39

5. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l NS 323.48 207 73.52 205.85

6. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) - 3 days (27° C)

mg/l ≤3 108 69 24 66

7. Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 130 435 140 480

8. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 490 240 45 215

9. Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 65 60 35 95

10. Magnesium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l -- 425 180 10 120

11. Ca mg/l +2 -- 26.05 24.05 14.03 38.08

12. Mg mg/l +2 -- 103.49 43.83 2.44 29.22

13. Chlorides (Cl-1) mg/l NS 2539.21 360 309.90 582.31

14. Sulphates (SO4-2) mg/l NS 139.81 78.21 59.44 137.07

15. Sodium (Na+) mg/l NS 449 145 82.7 206

16. Potassium (K+) mg/l NS 10 27.6 25.5 34.3

17. Copper mg/l NS 0.278 0.311 0.209 0.197

18. Lead mg/l NS < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001

19. Iron mg/l NS 0.262 0.606 BDL 0.282

20. Zinc mg/l NS 0.054 0.098 0.124 0.257

21. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l NS BDL BDL BDL BDL

22. Phenol mg/l 0.005 ND ND ND ND NS: Not specified; # BDL: Below Min. Detection Limit




Table 3-17 : Analysis results of River Water

Sr. No. Parameters Unit IS 2296 : 1982 Class B -Outdoor BathingPermissible limit

Analysis Results of Pond water of:

Sabarmati river

1. pH - 6.5 - 8.5 9.19

2. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l NS 712

3. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l NS 79.88

4. Phosphates mg/l NS 20.65

5. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l NS 220.56

6. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) - 3 days (27° C) mg/l ≤3 72

7. Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 100

8. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 170

9. Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 95

10. Magnesium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l -- 75

11. Ca mg/l +2 -- 38.08

12. Mg mg/l +2 -- 18.26

13. Chlorides (Cl-1) mg/l NS 214.93

14. Sulphates (SO4-2) mg/l NS 130.81

15. Sodium (Na+) mg/l NS 207

16. Potassium (K+) mg/l NS 34.4

17. Copper mg/l NS 0.360

18. Lead mg/l NS < 0.001

19. Iron mg/l NS 0.703

20. Zinc mg/l NS 0.262

21. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l NS BDL

22. Phenol mg/l 0.005 ND Note: NS: Not specified




Table 3-18 : Analysis Results of GIDC reservoir

Sr. No. Parameters Unit IS 10500: 2012 (drinking water std.) Analysis results of GIDC

water – sample taken from Project site

Acceptable limit Permissible limit

1. pH - 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 - 8.5 6.75 2. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l 500 2000 1462 3. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l NS NS 2.14 4. Phosphates mg/l NS NS 0.46 5. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l NS NS 58.81 6. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) - 3 days (27° C) mg/l ≤2* ≤2* 17.25 7. Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l 200 600 640 8. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 200 600 355 9. Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS NS 185 10. Magnesium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l -- -- 170 11. Ca mg/l +2 -- -- 74.15 12. Mg mg/l +2 -- -- 41.10 13. Chlorides (Cl-1) mg/l 250 1000 519.83 14. Sulphates (SO4-2) mg/l 200 400 94.05 15. Sodium (Na+ mg/l ) NS NS 186 16. Potassium (K+ mg/l ) NS NS 33.6 17. Copper mg/l 0.05 1.5 0.406 18. Lead mg/l 0.01 0.01 < 0.001 19. Iron mg/l 0.3 0.3 0.317 20. Zinc mg/l 5.0 15.0 0.220 21. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l 0.5 0.5 BDL 22. Phenol mg/l 0.001 0.002 ND

Note: NS: Not specified




Table 3-19 : Analysis Results of Ground Water

Sr. No.

Parameters Unit IS 2296 : 1982 Class B -Outdoor bathing

Permissible limit

Ghodasar Laxmipura Ramol Vanch Geratpur

Geratnagar

1. pH - 6.5 - 8.5 6.96 6.91 6.82 6.89 6.84 7.20 2. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l NS 292 1812 1116 918 1534 844 3. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l NS 2 116 140 58 122 166 4. Phosphates mg/l NS BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5. Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 140 340 540 560 620 340 6. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 155 425 205 168 331.2 100 7. Calcium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l NS 70 180 85 120.96 178.56 70 8. Magnesium Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 85 245 120 47.04 152.64 30 9. Ca mg/l +2 28.05 72.14 34 50 74.54 28.05 10. Mg mg/l +2 20.66 59.65 30.04 11.45 37.16 7.24 11. Chlorides (Cl-1) mg/l NS 117 900 301 209.81 499.77 254.6 12. Sulphates (SO4-2) mg/l NS 85.78 157.86 102 82 209.57 114.57 13. Sodium (Na+ mg/l ) NS 45.6 269 101 219 281 218 14. Potassium (K+ mg/l ) NS 10.2 16.3 19.9 22.6 28.5 30.3 15. Copper mg/l NS 0.392 0.423 0.284 0.232 0.342 0.386 16. Lead mg/l NS < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 17. Iron mg/l NS 0.034 0.034 0.413 BDL BDL 0.344 18. Zinc mg/l NS 0.087 0.151 0.059 0.022 0.102 0.002 19. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l NS BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 20. Phenol mg/l 0.005 ND ND ND ND ND ND




3.13 Soil Environment (Base-Line Data)

The soil samples were collected from 6 different locations once during the study period in the study area presented in Table 3-20, Photographs of sampling location is attached as Annexure- 3.5.

Table 3-20 : Soil sampling location details

3.13.1 Duration of Sampling Method of Testing and Results

At each sampling site, samples were collected at a depth of 0 – 20 cm and mixed together to form composite sample. Large stones, gravels and plant roots, were removed from soil.

Physico-Chemical characteristics of soil samples were determined from 5% leachate of the samples. Standard procedures were followed for analysis. The results of physico-chemical analysis of soil samples are presented in Table 3.21.

Table 3-21 :Chemical characteristics of soil

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Sampling locations Ghodasa

r Laxmipura Ramol Vanch Geratpur Geratnagar Anar

Chemicals Project

Site 1. pH -- 7.23 7.96 6.89 7.25 7.42 7.86 6.97 6.28 2. Water

holding capacity

% 38.5 36.5 33.8 39.2 36.4 41.5 36.1 43.8

3. Cation exchange capacity

Meq/ 100g

12.8 13.6 15.1 13.8 14.4 15.6 13.8 14.2

4. Available Nitrogen

mg/kg 11.2 15.6 18.9 22.5 24.5 21.8 26.5 20.2

5. Calcium as Ca

mg/kg 208.4 561 128.2 144.2 144 384 161 160

6. Magnesium as Mg

mg/kg

7. Sodium as Na

mg/kg 230 280 640 780 340 1780 510 980

8. Potassium as K

mg/kg 50 40 170 250 40 130 130 280

9. Phosphorous as P

mg/kg 0.7 1.3 7.6 2.9 1.6 0.09 2.1 2.3

Sr. No.

Village name Approximate radial distance from project

site (km)

Direction w.r.t. project site

Latitude Longitude

1. Ghodasar 3.43 293.01° 22°58'20.00"N 72°36'38.00"E 2. Laxmipura 7.12 250.55° 22°56'20.00"N 72°34'33.00"E 3. Ramol 2.46 10.88° 22°58'55.00"N 72°38'45.00"E 4. Vanch 5.49 115.91° 22°56'19.00"N 72°41'22.00"E 5. Geratpur 4.47 161.38° 22°55'19"N 72°39'19"E 6. Geratnagar 3.08 100.73° 22°57'18.00"N 72°40'15.00"E 7. Anar Chemicals 0.80 273.05° 22°57'38.01"N 72°38'00.38"E 8. Project Site -- -- 22°57'36.55"N 72°38'28.62"E




Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Sampling locations Ghodasa

r Laxmipura Ramol Vanch Geratpur Geratnagar Anar

Chemicals Project

Site 10. Porosity mg/kg 42.8 43.2 44.9 38.6 38.5 40.6 40.4 42.8 11. Total Boron mg/kg < 0.01 < 0.01 <

0.01 <

0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01

12. Total Iron mg/kg 1.18 1.36 1.42 1.39 1.36 1.58 1.74 1.84

3.14 Ecology and Biodiversity

Biodiversity is often considered synonymous with species richness of the area. Identifying, measuring, and monitoring biodiversity is a complex exercise. The Biodiversity assessment generally concern with, conducting biodiversity inventories; inventories for assessing existing biodiversity or stock taking. This provides the information on the biodiversity richness of the area under consideration. The biodiversity resources have never been so impoverished, largely as a result of agriculture intensification. In addition, development pressure as a result of industrialization, human population expansion and resultant increases in the “ecological foot print” of our own species has taken toll on biodiversity. A baseline survey is carried out to determine the habitats and species present on a site and their current condition.

3.14.1 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

Conference of parties to the Convention on Biological diversity (CBD) held at Curitiba, Brazil on March 20th -31st ,2006 suggested biodiversity to be considered in impact assessment by providing voluntary guidelines on biodiversity inclusive Environmental Impact Assessment. CBD provides a strong international platform for applying impact assessment techniques to biodiversity conservation. It specifically calls for impact assessment measures to ensure that biodiversity is addressed in projects, plan and policy decision (Article14). An underlying justification for the application of impact assessment is also given in Article -8 which is for promoting the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats, promoting environmentally sound and sustainable development in areas next to the protected areas.

3.14.2 BiologicalDiversity

The variety and variability of organisms and ecosystems is referred to as biological diversity or Bio diversity. Biodiversity is a term which has gained enormous importance in the past few years. Technically, it is a contraction of 'biological diversity. For the purposes of the CBD (Article 2. Use of Terms), 'Biological Diversity' is "the variability among living organisms from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are part; this includes diversity within species, between species and of ecosystems". In practice, 'biodiversity' is most often used as a collective noun synonymous with nature or 'Life on Earth' (WCMC Biodiversity Series No 5, 1996).

The biodiversity, we see today is the result of billions of years of evolution, shaped by natural processes. The vast array of interactions among the various components of biodiversity makes the planet habitable for all species, including humans. There is a growing recognition that, biological diversity is a global asset of tremendous value to present and future generations. At the same time, the threat to species and ecosystems has never been as great as it is today. Species extinction caused by human activities continues at an alarming rate. Protecting biodiversity is for our self-interest and also for the future generation.




3.14.3 Ecological Impact Assessment

Ecological impact assessment (EcIA) is used to predict and evaluate the impacts of development activities on ecosystems and their components, thereby providing the information needed to ensure that ecological issues are given full and proper consideration in development planning. Environmental impact assessment (EIA) has emerged as a key to sustainable development by integrating social, economic and environmental issues in many countries.

EcIA has a major part to play as a component of EIA but also has other potential applications in environmental planning and management. Ecological Impact Assessment provides a comprehensive review of the EcIA process and summarizes the ecological theories and tools that can be used to understand, explain and evaluate the ecological consequences of development proposals.

Environmental impact assessments have become an integral part of development projects in India ever since 1994, to formulate policies and guidelines for environmentally sound economic development. Proper assessment of biological environment and compilation of its taxonomical data is essential for the impact prediction.

Consistent and regularly updated data on regional and local taxonomy and floristic and faunal diversity of the areas are almost non-existent in country as diverse as India. Instant information on biodiversity profiles of the area, where the proposed project is setting up, is an essential part of the baseline studies of EIA. In such a situation, good primary baseline biodiversity survey is a pre-requisite for the collection of reliable data. The professional ethic of the EIA practitioners should be their will and skill to conduct scientific field surveys. These contributions towards biodiversity surveys may sometimes recognized as the actual value additions in terms of new records or a new data base but are more often recognized in the validation and updating of the existing information base.

3.14.4 Period of the study and Study area

The baseline survey for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment was done within 10 km radius of proposed expansion project site of existing M/S. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP, located at Plot No. 96 – 102, Phase - II, GIDC Vatva, District – Ahmedabad Gujarat was conducted during 3rd& 4th

June, 2019.

3.14.5 Methodology

For purpose of Environment Impact assessment (EIA) studies, the term biodiversity survey defines collection of spatial and or temporal data about spices/ community or a habitat. The information from the survey provides a snap shot of presence or absence and spatial distribution of important species .In EIA studies the survey data are used to evaluate the ecological resources on a site and its immediate surroundings, which is then assessed or evaluated. Impacts are consider in respect to this resources and assessed for significance.

The primary objective of the present survey was to describe the floristic and faunal communities within the study area. Survey conducted for EIA studies aimed to provide information on the following. What species and habitat occur in the project site and surroundings? Whether any threatened flora and fauna occur in the study area? If so, where do they occur?

Extrapolation and prediction techniques were used to limit the number of sites to be assessed. The knowledge of species habitats requirement, soil type, terrain, vegetation etc. were used to predict species occurrence.

This Extrapolation assessment Programme conducts preliminary for the assessment of biological value of poorly known area. The biological value of an area can be characterized by the species




richness, degree of spices endemism, uniqueness of the ecosystem and magnitude of threats of extinction.

This Rapid biodiversity assessment were undertaken by identifying potentially rich sites from satellite imaginary (Google Earth) and conducting the field survey in the potential habitats. GPS was utilized for locating field sample plots as well as gathering positional attributes of sighted flora and faunal species.

The methodology adopted for faunal survey involve; faunal habitat assessment, random intensive survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for reptiles, active search for scats and foot prints and review of previous studies. The aim was to set baselines in order to monitor and identify trends after the commencement of project activity.

Emphasis has been placed on presence of rare, endemic, migratory and threatened species, if any present in the study area. Desktop literature review was conducted to identify the representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities as listed by IUCN, ZSI, BSI and in Indian Wild Life Protection act, 1972. The threat status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN category system.

3.14.5.1 Presence –Absence: Monitoring all species was not clearly feasible. Therefore the most commonly used species based attributes of habitat composition are species presences or absences, abundance of typical species or vegetation communities, and the distribution (range) of a species/ species.

The simplest target for a species is that its presence at the site or at defined location within the surrounding of it is maintained. This normally straightforward to monitor, but there are occasions, when difficulties may arise:, especially when the species that are inconspicuous, difficult to identify or rare, or those that inhabit in inaccessible areas. The distribution (range) of a species across asite can be monitored by assessing presence –absence across a number of locations (grids)

3.14.5.2 DAFOR Scale: The most commonly collected data during biological baseline survey are Nominal and Ordinal. In nominal survey, each survey location was assigned predefined category, species are recorded as being present or absent at allocation or a habitat. In ordinal survey, this is an extension of nominal data in which categories are ordered. Here the abundance of a Flora species at a location (study area) is classified in an ordered scale as per their occurrence in quadrates studied such as Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal., 2005)

While abundance of a fauna species at a location (study area) is classified in an ordered scale as per their occurrence/ opportunistic sighting during the study period as: VCom: Very common, Com: Common, LCom: Locally common, UnCom: Un Common and Rar; Rare.

3.14.6 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

3.14.6.1 Habitats description of the project site and its immediate surroundings




Figure No 3-6 Google imaginary snap shot showing project site and immediate surroundings

At present, the predominant land use category in immediate surroundings of the project site is other industries in GIDC and urbanization of Ahmedabad city. No eco-sensitive area like, birds nesting and brooding sites, habitat of any rare and endangered flora and fauna observed in the project site or within the close proximity of the project site.

Figure No.3-7 Project site view during the survey period




3.14.6.2 Habitats description of the area (10 Km): Agricultural fields are limited to South- East and south West side of the project site that also confined to a limited patch in Singarva village, Gatrad village, Memadpur village, Aslali village, Chosar village and Gamdi village. Northern part of the study area is covered by the Urbanization of Ahmedabad city. Natural habitats thus confined to very limited area due to this urbanization intensification of agriculture activities. Few of the cultivable land in this area was observed with crop, Bajri, during survey period in June, 2019. Few very large inland water bodies are characteristic of this area, Lake at Godasar village ( 22059” 07.5”, 720 36’43.9”) , Kankaria Lake in Ahmedabad city( 23000” 16.0”, 720 35’56.5”), Lake at Isanpur village ( 2205844.0”, 720 36’06.0”), Malek saban lake near Saraspur village ( 23001” 40.0”, 720 37’49.7”), lake near Lamba village ( 22056” 05.2”, 720 34’27.4”) in addition to these, large village ponds are observed near Asali village ( 22054” 54.5”, 720 35’39.8”) Nandej village ( 22053” 47.0”, 720 41’01.9”), Vinzol village ( 22059” 07.5”, 720 36’43.9”). Few barren lands covered with Prosopis juliflora was observed near Memadpur village, (22058”36.6”, 72041’14.1”). One scrub land with Prosopis juliflora and Acacia nilotica was observed between Badodara and Bhojpura villages (22057” 06.1”, 72038’.32.1”), near Kamod village (22056”22.7”, 720

33’.01.4”) and along the banks of Sabarmati river near Pirana treatment plant. Trees in the study area are also very few and restricted to /homestead/farmland /road side plantation. The most dominant farm land plantation of this area were Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Acacia nilotica (Bavalal)and Salvadorapersica (Piludo),A good population of Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) were observed in the study area especially in the surroundings of Godasar , Nandej village and Ramol village.




Figure No.3-8 Google imaginary snap shot of the study area

Figure No. 3-9 Habitats description of the area (10 Km)

Agriculture land Dominant lands use of the stud area




Road side planatation maninly by Azadirachta indica (Limbado),

Eucalypus planatation observed at many places

Godasar lake Kankaria lake

Scrub vegetation along the river bank near Pirana

Scrub land with Prosopis juliflora and Acacia nilotica was observed between Badodara and Bhojpura

villages




Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) Indian Peafowl (Pavo cristatus)

Painted strok (Mycteria leucocephala ) Yellow footed green pegion Treron

phoenicopterus

Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle (Lissemys punctate)

Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus)




Woolly-necked Stork (Ciconia episcopus ) Spot-billed Duck (Anas poecilorhyncha)

3.14.6.3 Floral Diversity of the study area The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region. The following account of floral diversity, based on the field survey conducted for a short duration on 03rd -4th

The permanent vegetation consists of Acacia nilotica, Salvadora persica, Salvadora oleoides, Prosopis juliflora, etc.Few shrubs and under shrubs noted in the open or in the shade of the thickets formed by bushy shrubs and herbs were, Xanthium strumarium L. (Gokhru), Triumfeta rotundifolia (Jipto), The aquatic plants are the denizens of ponds, puddles ant other low lying areas. The floristic composition of the area is subjected to variations due to various edaphic and biotic factors.The wetland vegetation( surroundings Lakes and Village ponds) in this area was represented by Lemna gibba, Hydrilla verticillata, Eichhornia crassipes,Ipomoea aquatica, Typha angustata, Hygrophila schulli .

June, 2019, is not very comprehensive data and is aimed only to give a general pattern of vegetation of this region during the study period as a baseline data. The vegetation of this area can be classified on the basis of habitats as; open fallow lands, area under cultivations, hedge vegetation, and vegetation in water logged region. The dominant tree species, herbs and shrubs and major crops, were documented during this base line study.

The tree species observed in the study area is enlisted in the Table 3-21. The shrubs observed in the study are documented in the Table 3-22.Herbs and climbers in the study area are represented in Table 3-23 and Table 3-24 respectively.

3.14.6.3.1 Trees The dominant trees in the study area wereAzadirachta indica (Limbado), Salvadorapersica (Piludo), Salvadora oleoides (Piludi),and Acacia nilotica (Bavalal)which are generally planted as the road side plantation or along the agriculture fields for shades. Otherwise natural tree cover is very less in this part of Ahmedabad District. The list of tree species is enlisted in the Table 3-21. 62species oftrees belong to 24 families are enumerated from the study area,

The trees in the study area were generally planted either as farmland plantation or Homestead plantation or as road side plantation. No natural forest area observed in the study area. Dominant tree species in the farmland were Prosopis cineraria (Khyigdo). Azadirachta indica (Limbado),Salvadora perisica , (Piludi), Acacia nilotica (Bhaval), and very few Homestead plantation was dominated by Pithecellobium dulce (Gorasmli), Moringa pterygosperma (Sargavo), Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Tamarindus indica L.( Amali ),Salvadora perisica.

The list of tree species is enlisted in the Table 3-22. 31 species of trees belong to 19 families are enumerated from the study area from the sampling plots.




Table 3-22 : Trees in the study area

# Family & Scientific name Vernacular name

Relative abundance in sampling plots

1 Family: Anacardiaceae 1/1 Mangiferaindica L. Kari D 2 Family: Annonaceae 2/1 Polylathialongifolia (Conn.) Thw. Asopalav F 3 Family: Apocynaceae 3/1 Plumeriarubra L. Champo O 4/2 Alstonia scholaris L. Br Satparni F 4 Family: Arecaceae 5/1 Borassus flabellifer Tad O 6/2 Cocos nucifera L. Narial O 7/3 Livistona rotundifolia R 8/4 Phenix sylvestris L Kajuri O 9/5 Roystonea regia (H.B.&K.) Cook O 5 Family: Bignoniaceae 10/1 Jacandra acutifilia Humb&Bonpl. O 11/2 Kigelia africana lam. O 12/3 Tabebuia argentea Bur&Schum. O 13/4 Tabebuia rosea (Bertol) O 14/5 Tecoma satans. R 15/6 Tecomella undulata Sm. O 6 Family Boraginaceae 16/1 Cordia dichotoma Forst. O 17/2 Cordia gharaf Ghundi O 18/3 Cordia sebastena L. O 7 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 19/1 Bahunia purpurea L. Kanchner O 20/2 Bahunia racemose Lam. O 21/3 Delonixregia (Boj.) Raf. Gaulmor O 22/4 Delonixelata (L.) Gamble. Sandsro O 23/5 Cassiafistula L. Garmalo O 24/6 Cassiasiamea Lam. Kasid D 25/7 Peltophorumpterocarpum (DC.)

Backer ex Heyne Sonmukhi D

26/8 Tamarindus indicum L. Amali O 8 Family: Caricaceae 27/1 Carica papaya L. Papaya O 9 Family: Casuarinaceae 28/1 Casuarinaequisetifolia L. Sharu O 10 Family: Combretaceae 29/1 Anogeissus latifolia ( Roxb) Dhavdo O 30/2 Terminaliacatappa L. Badam O 11 Family: Malvaceae 31/1 Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol.ex

Corr. Paras piplo O

12 Family: Meliaceae 32/1 Azadirachta indica A.Juss Limbado D




33/2 Melia azadirachta L. Bakanlimdo O 13 Family:Mimosaceae 34/1 Acacia auriculiformis L. Austrianbaval F 35/2 Acacia leucophloea (Roxb) Willd. Hermobaval F 36/3 Acacia nilotica (L.)

Del.subsp.indica (Bth.) Brenan Baval D

37/4 Acacia Senegal (L.) Willd. Goradiobaval O 38/5 Albizialebbeck (L.) Bth. Siris O 39/6 Albiziaprocera (Roxb.) Bth. Kalo siris O 40/7 Leucaenaleucocephala (Lam.) De Pardesi Baval D 41/8 Pithecellobiumdulce (Roxb.) Bth. Gorasmli F 42/9 Prosopiscineraria (L.) Druce Khyigdo F 14 Family:Moraceae 43/1 Ficusbenghalensis L. Vad O 44/2 Ficus hispida L. Dhedhumaro O 45/3 Ficusracemosa L. Umaro O 46/4 Ficusreligiosa L. Piplo O 15 Family:Moringaceae 47/1 Moringa pterygospermaGaertn.,

Fruct Sargavo O

16 Family:Myrtaceae 48/1 Eucalyptussp. Nilgari A 49/2 Syzygium cumini (L.) Skeels. Jambu R 50/3 Callistemon citrinus Bottle brush O 17 Family:Papilionaceae 51/1 Dalbergialatifolia Roxb. Sisam A 52/2 Erythrina variegata L. Pagario O 53/3 Derris Indica (Lam.) Karanj O 18 Family:Poaceae 54/1 Dendrocalamus strictus (Roxb) Bans O 19 Family:Salvadoraceae 55/1 Salvadorapersica L. Piludo D 56/2 Salvadora oleoides Decne Piludi F 20 Family:Sapotaceae 57/1 Manilkara hexandra (Roxb.) Dub. Rayan O 58/2 Manilkara zapota (L.) Chikoo O 21 Family:Simaroubaceae 59/1 Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Aurdso O 22 Family:Rhamnaceae 60/1 Zizyphusglabrata Heyne ex Roth. Bor O 23 Family:Rutaceae 61/1 Limonia acidissima L. O 24 Family:Verbenaceae 62/1 Tectonagrandis L.f. Sag O Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal. 2005)

3.14.6.3.2 Shrubs Shrubs observed during the present survey are given in the Table3-23.29 shrub species belong to 18 families are enumerated from the study area. The dominant shrub community in this area was




represented by, Xanthiumstrumarium, Prosopisjuliflora, Lawsonia inermis (Mendhi), andLantana camara (Ganthai).

Table 3-23 : List of the shrubs in the study area

Family & Scientific name Vernacular name

Relative abundance in sampling plots

1 Famliy :Apocynaceae 1/1 Nerium indicum Lalkaren F 2/2 Thevetia peruviana Merr. Pili karan F 2 Family: Asclepiadaceae 3/1 Calotropis gigantea (L.) R. Br Akado F 4/2 Calotropis procera (Ait.) R.Br Akado D 3 Family: Bignoniaceae 5/1 Tecoma stans (L.) H.B.& K. Peilafol O 4 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 6/1 Cassia auriculata L D 7/2 Cesalpinia pulcherrima L. 5 Family:Capparaceae 8/1 Capparis decidua( forsk.)Edgew Kerdo F 6 Family:Compositae 8/1 Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru D 7 Family:Convolvulaceae 9/1 Ipomoea fistulosa Mart.ex Choisy Nasarmo O 8 Family:Combretaceae 10/1 Conocarpus erectus L 9 Family:Euphorbiaceae 11/1 Euphorbia neriifolia L. Thor F 12/2 Jatropha curcas L. Ratanjot O 13/4 Ricinus communis L. Devalo O 10 Family:Lythraceae 14/1 Lawsonia inermis L. Mendhi D 11 Family:Malvaceae 15/1 Abelomoschus manihot (L.) Medic. Jagali bhindi O 16/2 Abutilon indicum (L.) Sw. Khapat F 17/3 Gossypium herbaceum Kapas O 12 Family:Musaceae 18/1 Musa paradisiaca L. Kela O 13 Family:Mimosaceae 19/1 Prosopis juliflora DC Gando baval D 20/2 Acacia jacquemontii Bth. Rato baval O 14 Family:Nyctaginaceae 21/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel F 15 Family: Papilionaceae 22/1 Sesbania sesban (L.) Merr. Shevari F 16 Family:Rhamnaceae 23/1 Zizyphus nummularia (Burm.f.) W. &. Chanibor F 24/2 Zizyphus mauritiana Lam. - Boadi O 17 Family:Solanaceae 25/1 Datura metel L Daturo O 26/2 Solanum incanum L Ubhi ringan O




27/3 Solanum indicum O 18 Family:Verbenaceae 28/1 Clerodendrum inerme (L.) Gaertn. Madhi O 29/2 Lantana camara L.var.aculcata (L.) Mold. Ganthai F Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal., 2005)

3.14.6.3.3 Herbs

Theherbs observed in the sampling plots, during the survey period in the study area have been enlisted in the Table 3-24. 52species of herbs belongs to 25 families were documented from the sampling plots laid in different habitats. Herbaceous layer WAS dominated by Triumfeta rotundifolia (Jipto), Physalis peruvianaduring the study period

Table 3-24 : List of herbaceous species observed in the study area

Family & Scientific name Vernacular name Relative abundance in sampling plots

1 Family: Acanthaceae 1/1 Barleria sp. --- O 2/2 Hygrophila schulli(Buch.-Ham.) Kanatashelio,Akaro 2 Family: Alismataceae

3/1 Limnophyton obtusifolium L O 3 Family Amaranthaceae

4/1 Achyranthes aspera L. Anghedi, Anghedo D 4 Family :Araceae

5/1 Colocasia esculenta (L) F 5 Family :Asteraceae

6/1 Echinops echinatus Roxb Shulio F 7/2 Tridax procumbens L Pardesi Bhangro D 6 Boraginaceae

8/1 Trichodesma indicum L. D 7 Convolvulaceae

9/1 Cressa cretica L D 8 Cyperaceae

10/1 Cyperus difformis L. D 11/2 Cyperus rotundus L. D 12/3 Cyperus sp. D 13/4 Fimbristylis sp. D

9 Gentianaceae 14/1 Nymphoides indicum (Roxb.) Kumudini O 10 Hydrocharitaceae

15/1 Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle O 16/2 Vallisneria spiralis L. O 17/3 Ottelia alismodies L. O 11 Lamiaceae

18/1 Ocimum sanctum L. Tulsi O 19/2 O. canum Sims Ramtulsi F 20/3 O .basilicum L. Damro O 12 Family: Lemnaceae




21/1 Lemna gibba L. O 13 Liliaceae

22/1 Aloe barbadensis Mill. Kunvarpato O 14 Malvaceae

23/1 Sida alba L. Bala F 24/2 Pavonia zeylanica Cav. F 15 Menispermaceae

25/1 Cocculus hirstus L Vevdi D 16 Nymphaeaceae

26/1 Nymphaea pubescens Wild Kamal O 17 Papilionaceae

27/2 Crotalaria burhia Bach. – Ham. Kharshan D 28/3 Crotalaria medicaginea Lam. Ranmethi D 29/4 Indigofera oblongifolia Forks. -- F 30/5 Tephrosia sps. -- D 31/6 Tephrosia purpurea Pers. Sarpankho F 32/7 Medicago sativa L. Rajko O 18 Papaveraceae.

33/1 Argemone mexicana L. Darudi O 19 Poaceae

34/1 Aleuropus lagopoides (L) D 35//2 Aristida sp. D 36/3 Cynodon barberi Rang. D 37/4 Cynodon dactylon (L.) D 38/5 Phragmites kara (Retz.) O 39/6 Sorghum bicolor (L.) Jowar F 40/7 Zea mays Makai O 20 Polygonaceae

41/1 Polygonum glabrumwilld O 21 Solanaceae

42/1 Capsicum annum O 43/2 Solanum indicum L. Ringni O 44/3 Solanum surattense Brum. Bhoringni O 45/4 Physalis peruviana L., D 22 Pontederiaceae

46/1 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Solms O 23 Trapaceae

47/1 Trapa natans L var. bispinosa Shinghoda O 24 Tiliaceae

48/1 Corchorus depressus Stocks Jitali D 49/2 Triumfeta rotundifolia Lam. Jipto D 50/3 Typha angustata Bory & Chaub Ramban,Ghabajariu O 25 Zygophyllaceae

51/1 Fagonia cretica L. Dhramau F 52/2 Tribulus terrestris L. Mithu Gokhru F

Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal., 2005)

3.14.6.3.4 Climbers and Twiners Climbers/ twiners in the study area dominated by, Ipomoea pes-tigridis (Wagpadi), Ipomea pes-caprae (Dariani vel), Ipomea aquatica (Nali ni Bhaji), Coccinia grandis (Ghiloda), Luffa




cylindrica(Galku), and Abrus precatorius (Chanothai). The major climbers and twiners observed in the study area in the sampling plots are given in the Table 3-25. 12 species of climbers/ twiners belongs to 7 families are recorded from the area.

Table 3-25 : List of climbers observed in the area

Family & Scientific name Vernacular name Relative abundance in sampling plots

1 Asclepiadaceae 1/1 Pentatropis spiralis (Forsk.) Decne Shingroti A 2 Convolvulaceae 2/1 Ipomoea obscura L. A 3/2 Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Nadanivel A 4/3 Ipomoea pes-caprae Dariani vel/Maryad vel F 3 Caesalpiniaceae 5/1 Caesalpinia cristaL. Kachka F 4 Cucurbitaceae 6/1 Coccinia grandis Ghiloda F 7/2 Luffa cylindrica (L.) M.J.Roem Galku O 8/3 L. acutangula (L) Jungli turia O 5 Cuscutaceae O 9/1 Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel 6 Menispermaceae 10/1 Cocculus hirsutus (L.) Diels Vevdi A 7 Papilionaceae 11/1 Mucuna prurita Hk.f. Kavach, Koyli O 12/2 Abrus precatorius L. Chanothi O

Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal., 2005)

3.14.6.3.5 Cultivated Plants in the study area

Villages located at South and south west in the study areaare still actively engaged in large scale agricultural practices. The agricultural crops, practiced in this area during June, 2019were, Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides). Rice(Oryza sativa) is generallycultivated as major crop immediately after monsoon and wheat as a major during winter season in this part of Ahmedabad District.

Major Crops: Major crop in the study area during the study period (June) was Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides). Rice(Oryza sativa) is generallycultivated as major crop immediately after monsoon and wheat as a major during winter season in this part of Ahmedabad District.

3.14.6.3.6 Horticulture Practices and fruit grown A horticulture activity is not that prominent in this part of Ahmedabad district. Mango trees (Mangifera indica) and Tamarindus trees (Tamarindus indica) were observed adjacent to the residential area and also along the road side at almost all villages.

3.14.6.3.7 Rare and Endangered flora in the study area The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Out of 17000 species of higher plants known to occur in India, nearly 614 higher




plant species were evaluated by IUCN. Among them 247 species are under threatened category (IUCN, 2007).Among theenumerated flora in the study area, no rare and endangered flora was observed. 3.14.6.3.8 Endemic Plants ofthe Study Area:

De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit, especially a species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region through geographical, ecological or temporal barriers.Out of 17000 species of known flowering plants of India nearly 5000 species are said to be endemic. Nearly 58 genera and 1932 taxa are found to be endemic to peninsular India (Ahmedulla & Nayar, 1987). Among recorded plant species none of them can be assigned endemic status of this region.

3.14.7 Faunal Biodiversity in the study area

For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles, amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted. The area of faunal diversity importance like, barren land, village ponds, water logged region, Gaoucher land covered with scrub vegetation, agriculture hedges, road side ditches in villages were covered for the present biological baseline study with in 10 km radius of the project site. This report is based on a short duration study. The following lists are obviously incomplete. It does not include many other species which might occur in this part of Ahmedabad District, either as resident or as migrant in the other seasons of the year. This data is based on the survey conducted during June, 2019.

3.14.7.1 Birds of the study area

Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of occurrence is given in the Table 3-26.

Table 3-26 :Systematic List of birds in the study area with its distribution and migratory status

Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name Resident Status

Abundance status in

study area I. ORDER: FALCONIFORMES Family: Accipitridae (vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture) Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R UnCom Black-winged Kite Black-winged Kite Elanus caeruleus R UnCom Common Pariakh Kite Black Kite Milvus migrans R Rare II. ORDER: : CICONIIFORMES Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern) Pond Heron Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii R LCom Indian Reef Heron Western Reef-Egret Egretta gularis R Rare Purple Heron Purple Heron Ardea purpurea R Rare Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R VCom

Median or Smaller Egret Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia Egretta intermedia

R VCom

Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R LCom Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet )

Black-winged Stilt Black-winged Stilt Himantopus himantopus

R LCom

Red-wattled Lapwing Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R LCom





Abundance status in

study area White-tailed Lapwing White-tailed Lapwing Vanellus leucurus LCom Family: Ciconiidae (Open bill, stork, Adjutant) Open bill stork Asian Open bill Anastomus oscitans R Rare Family: Phalacrocoracidae ( Cormorant)

Indian Shag Indian Cormorant Phalacrocorax fuscicollis

R UnCom

Little Cormorant Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger R UnCom Family: Podicipedidae (Grebe) Little Grebe Little Grebe Tachybaptus ruficollis Rare Family: Pteroclidae (Sandgrouse)

Indian Sandgrouse Chestnut-bellied sandgrouse

Pterocles exustus R

UnCom

Family: Scolopacidae Bar-tailed Godwit Bar-tailed Godwit Limosa lapponica W R Redshank Common Redshank Tringa totanus W R Family: Threskiornithidae (Spoonbill and Ibis) Black Ibis Red-naped Ibis Pseudibis papillosa R LCom Spoonbill Eurasian Spoonbill Platalea leucorodia R Rare III ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove) Blue Rock Pigeon Rock Pigeon Columba livia R VCom Ring Dove Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto R VCom Rufous Turtle Dove Oriental Turtle-Dove Streptopelia orientalis R VCom IV: ORDER: CORACIFORMES Family: Dacelonidae (King fishers)

White breasted Kingfisher White-throated Kingfisher

Halcyon smyrnensis R

UnCom

Family: Cerylidae Pied Kingfisher Pied Kingfisher Ceryle rudis R UnCom Family: Coraciidae (Roller) BlueJay or Roller Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R UnCom Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater) Small Green bee-eater Little Green Bee-eater Merops orientalis R LCom: V. ORDER: CUCULIFORMES Family: Centropodidae (Cocucal) Crow-Pheasant or Coucal Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R Rar Family: Cuculidae (Cuckoo, Koel) Koel Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea R UnCom Indian Drongo Cuckoo Drongo Cuckoo Surniculus lugubris R UnCom VI. ORDER: GALLIFORMES Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl , Partridge, Quail, francolin, spur fowl, jungle fowl, Monal)

Common Peafowl Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R LCom VII. ORDER: GRUIFORMES Family: Rallidae ( Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail,)

White-breasted Water hen White-breasted Water hen

Amaurornis phoenicurus

R UnCom





Abundance status in

study area Coot Common Coot Fulica atra R UnCom VIII . ORDER: PASSERIFORMES

Family: Paridae (Tit ) Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R UnCom Family: Corvidae

Large Cuckoo-shrike Large Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novaehollandiae

R UnCom

House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R Com

Jungle crow Indian jungle crow Corvus (macrorhynchos) cluminatus

R Rar

Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R Rare Family: Laniidae (shrike) Grey Shrike Northern Shrike Lanius excubitor R UnCom Family: Muscicapidae ( Short wing, Chat, Robin, Shama Indian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R Com Magpie-Robin Oriental Magpie-Robin Copsychus saularis R UnCom Pied Bushchat Pied Bush chat Saxicola caprata R Com Family: Nectariniidae ( Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter ) Purple Sunbird Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R UnCom Small Sunbird Crimson-backed

Sunbird Nectarinia minima

R VCom

Family: Passeridae ( Avadavat, Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snow finch, sparrow, weaver ,Accentor) House Sparrow House Sparrow Passer domesticus R UnCom Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R UnCom Family: Pycnonotidae (Bulbul, ) Red-vented Bulbul Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R Com White-Cheeked Bulbul White-eared Bulbul Pycnonotus leucotis R UnCom Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling)

Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus

R Com

Brahminy Myna Brahminy Starling Sturnus pagodarum R Com Indian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R Com Rosy pastor Rosy Starling Sturnus roseus W Lcom Family: Sylviidae ( Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta ,Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds, Common Babbler Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R Com Jungle Babbler Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus R Com Tailorbird Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R UnCom IX. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet) Rose-ringed Parakeet Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R Com X.ORDER: STRIGIFORMES Family: Strigidae (Owl and Owlet) Spotted Owlet Spotted Owlet Athene brama R Rar XI. Order: Upupiformes Family: Upupidae Hoopoe Eurasian Hoopoe Upupa epops R Rar




Note Distribution status: R = Widespread Resident, WM: winter migrant Ref WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds/IUCN 2019, Bird Life International. 2018, Bird Life International. 2016.Kumar, A., J.P. Sati and P.C. Tak (2003): Checklist of Indian Water birds. BUCEROS 8 (1): 30 ppRelative Abundance: VC: Very common, C: Common, LC: Locally common, UC:Un Common and Rar; Rare.IUCN Status:ver 3.1 (LC) Least Concern, (NT) Nearthreatened; VU Vulnerable, The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Downloaded on 20 July 2019

IUCN evaluated 1254 bird species from India and categorized 77 species as threatened (13 species as critically endangered, 10 species as Endangered and 54 species as Vulnerable). Few of the sighted birds were evaluated as near threatened by IUCN, 2019. A taxon is Near Threatened, when it has been evaluated against the criteria but does not qualify for Critically Endangered, Endangered or Vulnerable categories, but is close to qualifying or is likely to qualify for a threatened category in the near future. 3.14.7.2 Butterflies from the study area

Butterflies in the study area are restricted to few places where Lantana camara and Calotropis procera were growing. Butterflies observed during the present study are documented in the Table 3-27.

Table 3-27 : Butterflies in the study area

Scientific name & family Common name Relative Abundance

Family Pieridae Eurema hecabe Linnaeus Common Grass yellow LC Ixias marianne Cramer White orange tip LC Ixias pyrene Linnaeus Yellow orange tip LC Family: Nymphalidae Melanitis leda Linnaeus Common evening Brown LC Junonia orithya Linnaeus Blue Pansy LC Danaus chrysippus Plain Tiger LC Danaus genutia Cramer Stripped Tiger LC Hypolimanas misippus Danaid egg fly LC Mycalesis perseus Common bush brown LC

Relative Abundance: VC: Very common, C: Common, LC: Locally common, UC:Un Common and R; Rare.

3.14.7.3 Herpetofauna

Reptiles observed in the study area are given in the Table 3-28.

Table 3-28 : Reptiles in the study area # Scientific name Common name Relative

Abundance IUCN statusVer3.1 (2019)

1 Calotes versicolor (Daudin) Common garden lizard LC Least Concern 2 Ptyas mucosus (Linn.) Common rat snake Least Concern 3 Hemidactylus flaviviridis (Ruppell) House Gecko LC Least Concern 4 Sitana ponticeriana ( Cuvier) Fan-Throated Lizard UC Least Concern 5 Naja naja (Linn.) Indian Cobra Least Concern 6 Daboia russelii ( Shaw and Nodder) Russell’s Viper Least Concern 7 Bungarus caeruleus ( Schneider Common Indian Krait Least Concern 8 Lissemys punctate ( Lacepede) Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle LC Least Concern

http://oldredlist.iucnredlist.org/static/categories_criteria_3_1�




Abundance status in study area: VCom: Very common, Com: Common, LCom: Locally common, UnCom: Un Common, Rar; Rare

= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers, during the interaction with them with pictorial presentation.

3.14.7.4 Mammals

The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from study area is documented in the Table3-29.

Table 3-29 : Mammals in the study area

S. No

Scientific name Common Name Relative Aabundance

IUCN status Ver3.1 (2019)

1 Mus booduga (Gray) Indian field mouse UC Least Concern 2 Herpestes edwardsi (Geoffroy) Common Mongoose UC Least Concern 3 Lepus sp. Hare UC Least Concern 4 Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton) Five striped Palm

squirrel C Least Concern

5 Sus scrofa (Linnaeus) Wild Boars Least Concern 6 Boselaphus tragocamelus (Pallas) Nilgai UC Least Concern

= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers ,during the interaction with them with pictorial presentation.Relative Abundance: VC: Very common, C: Common, LC: Locally common, UC:Un Common and R; Rare.The

IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Downloaded on 20 July 2019Rare and Endangered fauna of the study area

3.14.7.5 Rare and Endangered Fauna Of The Study Area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Of the total 63,837 species globally assessed by IUCN in 2012, 3,947 are classified as Critically Endangered, 81 as Extinct, 63 as Extinct in the Wild. In the lower risk categories, there were 5766 species in Endangered, 10,104 in Vulnerable and 4,467 in Near Threatened categories. Scientific data regarding 10,497 species was not available and hence classified as Data Deficient. As per IUCN Red list of threatened species (2019), one bird species , Woolly-necked Stork(Ciconia episcopus) is categorised as Vulnerable A2cd+3cd+4cd ver 3.1 while two bird species Black headed ibis, (Threskiornis melanocephalus),and Painted Stork (Mycteria leucocephala ) are grouped under near threatened category.

Table 3-30 : Threatened (vulnerable) and near threatened birds of the study area (IUCN, 2019) Species Habitat Location Coordinates Number Threat

status (IUCN,2019)

Painted Stork Mycteria leucocephala

It frequents freshwater marshes, lakes and reservoirs, flooded fields, rice paddies, irrigation canals, freshwater swamp forest, river banks, intertidal mudflats and saltpans

Shallow Water bodies, near Gatrad Village

220

72 58’ 55.3”

0

42’ 02.2”

2

Near threatened

http://www.iucnredlist.org/static/categories_criteria_3_1�




Woolly-necked Stork (Ciconia episcopus(Boddaert, 1783)

)

The species shows a preference for natural wetland habitats and grassland, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, water-holes, lagoons, dams, flood plains, marshes, and freshwater and peat swamp forests, although it will also use artificial habitats such as rice paddy-fields, flooded pastures, and cultivated fields.

Agriculture fields nearVinzol

220

72 57’ 06.6”

02

38’ 32.1”: Vulnerable

A2cd+3cd+4cd ver 3.1

Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus)

The species shows a preference for natural wetland habitats, lakes, ponds, water-holes, lagoons, dams, flood plains, marshes, and freshwater and peat swamp forests, although it will also use artificial habitats such as rice paddy-fields, flooded pastures, and cultivated fields

Shallow water bodies,Godasar lake

220

72 59’ 07.5”

02

36’ 43.9” Near

threatened ver.3.1

Gatrad Village 220

7259’ 55.1”

03

41’ 49.1 Singarva 230

7200’ 20.9”

02

41’ 48.8” Memadpur 220

72 58’ 39.7”

02

40’ 49.2” Ramol lake 220

72 58’49.3”

018

39’ 35.2” Nandej village pond

220

72 53’47.4”

020

41’01.9” Rice fields near Vinzol

220

72 57’ 06.6”

012

38’ 32.1”: Lamba lake 220

72 56’05.2”

05

34’27.4

The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Version 2019. <www.iucnredlist.org>. Downloaded on 20 July 2019.

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country.

Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in schedule I .of Wild life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IVof Wild life protection Act (1972).

Among the reptiles; (Indian Mud or Flap shell TurtleLissemys punctate) were provided protection as per Schedule-I of Wild life protection act, (1972). Common Indian monitor (Varanus bengalensis), Indian Cobra (Naja naja), and Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972).

Among mammalsCommon Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi)and Hanuman Langur(Semnopithecus entellus)is a schedule –II animals and and Nilghai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) are protected as Schedule-III animals of Wild Life Protection act 1972, while Five Striped Palm squirrel (Funambulus pennanii (Wroughton) is protected as Schedule IV mammal.


http://www.iucnredlist.org/�




Table 3-31 : Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972

Group Species Location and Nearest village

Coordinates Number Schedule Wild Life Protection act 1972.

Birds

Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus),

Kadodra 210

7245’ 14.8”

0

6 peahen

38’48.1.” 2 pea cock

Schedule I

Vav Near agriculture

fields

210

7245’ 12.4”

0

10 peahen

38’ 43.6” 6 pea cock

Vav Near village Pond

210

7245’ 29.0”

02 pea cock 39’ 41.8”

Padariya 210

7246’ 51.8”

0

10peahen

38’ 07.10” 10 pea

cock

few other birds Various

localities the study area

Schedule-IV

Reptiles

Indian Cobra (Naja naja),

Secondary Schedule-II

Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus)

Secondary Schedule-II

Mammals

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi),

Ambetha Village pond

210

7241’ 02.3”

0

35’35.8.”

1adult

Schedule-II

Indian fox (Vulpus bengalensis )

Near Saltpans towards Padariya

village

210

7246’ 01.2”

0

36’12.1.”

1 cub Schedule-II

Five striped Palm squirrel

(Funambulus pennanii )

Many places --

>40

Schedule-IV

Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus)

Secondary

Schedule-III

Wild Boars (Sus scrofa Linnaeus

Secondary - Schedule-III

Source: Wild Life Protection Act 1972 and its amendments




Figure No 3-10: Location of Indian Pea fowl, Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle & Woolly necked Stork

Species Habitat Nearest

village Distance from Project site inKm

Coordinates Number

Indian Pea fowl Village out skirt Chosmiya 7.65 23000’ 18.9”,720 2 41’48.9”

Indian Flap shell Turtle

Pond Godasar 4.04 22059’ 07.5” 720 >6 36’43.9” Pond Hirapur 8.6 22055’ 21.2”,

720>2

42’57.09” Pond Nandej 8.34 22053’47.0”, 720 >10 41’01.9”

Woolly-necked Stork Water looged region Vinzol 0.94

220 57’ 06.6”,720

38’ 32.1”: 2

3.14.7.6 Endemic fauna of the study area:

None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area.

3.14.7.7 Migratory birds & winter visitors in the study area: No migratory birds were observed in the study area during the survey conducted during June, 2019.

3.14.7.8 Status of the forest, their category in the study area: No natural forest was observed in the study area

3.14.7.9 CONSERVATION MEASURES FOR THE SCHEDULED-I CATEGORY FAUNA: No other fauna that falls under the scheduled-I category was reported from the study area except Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) and Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle Lissemys punctata . The rest of the fauna reported from the study area, falls under the schedule-II Schedule-III and Schedule-IV of the wild Life Protection Act 1972. Most of these species are not conservation dependant in Gujarat, and they are proliferating itself in its own habitats. Few of them like Nilgai




have become threat to the farmers as they are invading their cops very frequently in this region. Hence conservation measures are not provided for these animals. 3.14.7.9.1 Conservation Measures for Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) Schedule –I bird

species Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) is a very familiar bird of Gujarat also recognized as National Bird of India. The few population of this pheasant was reported from the some villages of the study area. Once common throughout the wooded lowlands of Gujarat, their population has been declined in recent decades.The male peacock is predominantly blue with a fan-like crest of spatula-tipped wire-like feathers and is best known for the long train made up of elongated upper-tail; these stiff and elongated feathers are raised into a fan and quivered in a display during courtship. The female lacks these feathers

Figure No 3-11: Photographof Indian Pea fowl.

Protection Status:

IUCN

Description:

The male, known as a peacock, is a large bird with a length from bill to tail of 100 to 115 cm (40 to 46 inches) and to the end of a fully grown train as much as 195 to 225 cm (78 to 90 inches) and weigh 4–6 kg (8.8–13.2 lbs). The females, or peahens, are smaller at around 95 cm (38 inches) in

http://www.iucnredlist.org/apps/redlist/details/106003802/0�




length and weigh 2.75–4 kg (6–8.8 lbs). Indian Peafowl are among the largest and heaviest representatives of the Phasianidae family. Their size, colour and shape of crest make them unmistakable within their native distribution range. The male is metallic blue on the crown, the feathers of the head being short and curled. The fan-shaped crest on the head is made of feathers with bare black shafts and tipped with blush-green webbing. A white stripe above the eye and a crescent shaped white patch below the eye are formed by bare white skin. The sides of the head have iridescent greenish blue feathers. The back has scaly bronze-green feathers with blackand copper markings. The scapular and the wings are buff and barred in black, the primaries are chestnut and the secondaries are black. The tail is dark brown and the "train" is made up of elongated upper tail coverts (more than 200 feathers, the actual tail has only 20 feathers) and nearly all of these feathers end with an elaborate eye-spot. A few of the outer feathers lack the spot and end in a crescent shaped black tip. The underside is dark glossy green shading into blackish under the tail. The thighs are buff colored. The male has a spur on the leg above the hind toe.

Peacocks are polygamous, and the breeding season is spread out but appears to be dependent on the rains. Several males may congregate at a lek site and these males are often closely related. Males at lek appear to maintain small territories next to each other and they allow females to visit them and make no attempt to guard harems. Females do not appear to favour specific males.

Peafowl are omnivorous and eat seeds, insects, fruits, and reptiles. A large percentage of their food is made up of the fallen berries. Around cultivated areas, peafowl feed on a wide range of crops such as groundnut, tomato, paddy, etc. Around human habitations, they feed on a variety of food scraps. In the countryside, it is particularly partial to crops and garden plants

Habitat:

The Indian Peafowl is found mainly on the ground in open scrub forest or on land under cultivation where they forage for berries, grains but will also prey on snakes, lizards, and small rodents. Their loud calls make them easy to detect, and in forest areas often indicate the presence of a predator such as a tiger. They forage on the ground in small groups and will usually try to escape on foot through undergrowth and avoid flying, though they will fly into tall trees to roost. The bird has a celebrated status in Indian mythology, and hence protected culturally in India especially in Gujarat. The Indian Peafowl is listed as Least Concern by IUCN.

Status in the study area:

No peacock was sighted in the projects site. All the direct sightings of the peacock were located near the barren lands land near habitations. This species is well adapted to natural village environment setting. Day time they temporarily move towards the surrounding agriculture areas for feeding while during night time they roost on the trees present in the village and in the agriculture hedges.Direct sightings of the peacock were in this village.

Location details of Peacock or Indian peafowl sighting in the study area

Habitat Nearest village Distance from Project site inKm

Coordinates Number

Agriculture fields Village out skirt

Chosmiya 7.65 23000’ 18.9”,720 2 41’48.9”

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindu_mythology�




Figure No 3-12: Location of Indian Pea fowl

Threats in the Study Area

No perceptible threats were identified in the villages surveyed. Village residents are against hunting or poaching of the peafowl, due to culture and mythology reasons. Only threat reported by the villagers are from stray dogs .Adult peafowl can usually escape ground predators by flying into trees. Foraging in groups provides some safety as there are more eyes to look out for predators

Conservation Recommended through Habitat Improvement and Awareness programme.

Habitat improvement programme can be undertaken through plantation of suitable tree species in the surrounding villages.While selecting the tree/ shrub species care shall be provided for beery plants which attract these birds. During summer period, villagers will be encouraged to use the old earthen pots to fill with water for drinking these birds.Summer is the time when these birds are facing shortage of feeds, there by supplying the feed like Bajri, Juwar, and Maize to the identified surrounding villages with good population of Indian peafowls will suffix the problem of food shortage. The proponent can directly supply these feed to the villages directly or by funding to the NGOs active in this mission.

3.14.7.9.2 Conservation Measures for Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle (Lissemys punctate) schedule- I reptile

The Indian Flap shell Turtle, Lissemys punctata (Family Trionychidae), is common in many relatively undisturbed environments throughout the Indian subcontinent. This may be the commonest turtle in the area (Das, 1991). It is a relatively small soft shell turtle with a carapace length of up to 350 mm. Freshwater turtles play important role in the health of aquatic ecosystem, since they are




scavengers, herbivores and carnivores, provide dispersal mechanism for plants, clean up water resources by scavenging on dead organic matter and help to maintain healthy populations of fish.

Figure No 3-13:Indian Mud or Flap Shell Turtle

Three intergrading subspecies are confined to the Indian sub-region. Individuals are adaptable and durable, occurring in a variety of aquatic habitats, ranging from rivers and streams to reservoirs, marshes, ponds, lakes, and even salt marshes, rice fields, gutters, and canals in metropolitan areas. It is common in brackish water lagoons on the east coast of India, and is often abundant in irrigation canals and tanks, and paddy fields with stagnant water. The Indian Flap shell Turtle is omnivorous and can survive periods of drought by estivating for a long time on land. Nesting generally occurs in late summer and extends into the monsoon season, July through November. Clutch size varies from 4–15 eggs, which generally have a prolonged incubation period of > 300 days. Despite extensive exploitation by man as a food source for many years, these turtles are still fairly common and seem to be holding their own, with populations relatively stable and not yet seriously threatened in India, although there is a general decline in its population due to reclamation of wetlands, pollution of water bodies etc

Protection Status:

IUCN:

National:

The species receives theoretical protection under the Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act, Schedule I [highest order of protection] of 1972

http://www.iucnredlist.org/apps/redlist/details/106003802/0�




International:

The subspecies has been listed in Appendix I of the Convention since 01/07/75. The species now down listed to Appendix II in 1994. IUCN 2013 Red List: categorised this turtle as Least Concern (assessed 2000).

Distribution:

Mainly distributed in the Indian sub-region from the Indus basin of Pakistan through India, Nepal, and Bangladesh to northeast India and extreme western Myanmar. Populations on Sri Lanka formerly considered to belong to this species have recently been recognized as the distinct species L. ceylonensis. Three subspecies of Lissemys punctata are currently recognized in Indian sub -continent Viz., :L. p. punctata, L. p. andersoni, and L. p. vittata

Distribution in study area:

Live individuals are maintained for ritualistic and religious reasons and often kept in in many village ponds in India. During survey period Flap shell Turtles were observed in the following Village ponds.

Habitat Nearest village Distance from Project site inKm Coordinates Number

Pond Godasar 4.04 22059’07.5” ,720 >6 36’43.9”

Pond Hirapur 8.6 22055’21.2”, 720 >2 42’57.09”

Pond Nandej 8.34 22053’47.0”, 720 >10 41’01.9”

Figure No 3-14: Location of Indian Mud or Flap shell Turtle

Description

Femoral flaps and nasal septal ridges are present. Shell closure (femoral flaps and moveable anterior plastral lobe) allows for complete concealment of head, neck, and limbs and thus protection from predators and desiccation (Auffenberg, 1981). The carapace is relatively humped and smooth-




surfaced in juveniles and adults, but hatchlings have low, indistinct ridges of tubercles, most prominent along the lateral margins. Young and adults have a complete marginal ridge (seam paralleling anterior rim of carapace) with little modification in the nuchal region. The ante brachial scalation consists of four to six curved, cuspedged scales that are distal to the upper marginal completely smooth scale. (Bhupathy etal., 2014) The carapace shape is nearly circular in hatchlings, more oval in adults. Adult females are larger than males (Auffenberg, 1981; Agarwal, 1987; Shrestha, 1997). The bony carapace has a distinctive, sandpapery or sharkskin texture, contrasting with the relatively coarsely pitted texture in most trionychid species

Habitat and Ecology.

The Indian Flap shell Turtle occurs in a variety of aquatic habitats, ranging from rivers and streams to reservoirs, marshes, ponds, lakes, and even salt marshes, rice fields, gutters, and canals in metropolitan areas (Das 1991, Moll and Moll 2004, Hossain et al. 2008). This species appears to tolerate salt water conditions well, as it is common in brackish water lagoons in the Sunderbans (West Bengal), Bhitarkanika (Orissa), and Coringa (Andhra Pradesh) of the east coast of India. It is often abundant in irrigation canals and tanks, and paddy fields with stagnant water (Rashid and Swingland 1977). (Bhupathy etal., 2014)

Movements and Estivation.

Overland movements occur in response to either drought conditions, or increased water depth during the rainy season. In the latter instance, turtles move overland into shallow pools; when these dry up they move back into the larger, permanent sites. Turtles move overland, burrow, and estivate when shallow ponds and lakes dry up in the summer months (peak in May); larger sites may go dry in later months if drought conditions persist into the monsoon seasons (Bhupathy etal., 2014)

Diet:

The species is an opportunistic omnivore. Varghese and Tonapi (1986) reported that captives were omnivorous. Food items include adult frogs, tadpoles, fish, crustaceans, molluscs, earthworms, insects, carrion, and water plants (Sharma and Vazirani 1977; Tikader and Sharma 1985; Das 1991; Schleich and Kästle 2002)

Reproduction:

The reproductive cycle of L. punctate differs according to geographic region and it seems that it is closely correlated with monsoon seasons and heavy rains (Gramentz 2011).

Nesting:

Nesting generally occurs in late summer, extending into the monsoon season, July through November. Turtles inhabiting perennial rivers may move through canals to find suitable nesting sites in loamy soil. Minton (1966) reported nest excavation (slow movement of hind limbs) about seven feet from the pond edge. Das (1985, 1991) reported nests 8–10 cm deep, close to water, either under cover of thorny bushes or fully exposed. Sandy areas are not preferred for nesting.

General Threats to Survival:

Predation. The Indian Flap shell Turtle and its eggs are rather heavily exploited for food. Aside from human exploitation for food, mortality is caused by a variety of predators. Antipredator adaptations include the ability to completely close the shell (concealing soft body parts), and to secrete from the two pairs of Rathke’s glands (Erhenfeld and Erhenfeld, 1973) an egg-yolk like fluid that has an objectionable odor and presumably bad taste (Auffenberg, 1981). Khan (2006) noted variation in




temperament of individuals, with some being docile, allowing free handling, whereas others hissed loudly and lunged with open mouth, voiding the foul-smelling secretions

Lissemys punctata and its eggs are rather heavily exploited for food and it is one of the most frequently observed species in markets (Whitaker 1997). Some 50–70 thousand are sold each year (early 1980s) in the Howrah Market near Kolkata (Das 1991; Whitaker 1997). Choudhury et al. (2000) noted that L. punctata was the most common Indian soft shell in the meat trade, and that habitat loss was not a major concern.

Major threat criteria:

1. With a market and assured price tag, turtles provided an extra income for fishermen, further unlike fishes turtles could be kept alive and fresh for a long duration thus assuring a good market price.

2. Increasing destruction and shrinkage of their habitat 3. Increase in the price of fish and other meat products, making it unaffordable for people of

lower income groups, who then find turtle meat a better and cheaper substitute. 4. Traditional medicinal beliefs attached to turtle meat and products 5. Turtle being a slow moving and linked to an accessible habitat are vulnerable to easy

capture. 6. The commercial exploitation at many parts of India is a cause of worry for the survival of

several turtle species including The Indian Flap shell Turtle especially because of low reproductive capability due to late sexual maturity, small brood sizes and low survival rate of hatchlings

General Threats to Survival in the study area:

No perceptible threats are identified in the villages surveyed. Commercial exploitation that prevails in other part of India especially west Bengal, was not reported from the study area in Gujarat, except very few communities reported to haunting this turtles for consuming the turtle meats and eggs. Village residents are against hunting or poaching of The Indian Flap shell Turtle due to culture and mythology reasons. The major threat in this part of Gujarat is

Conservation Recommended through Habitat Improvement and Awareness programme.

increasing destruction and shrinkage of their habitat, and manual fishing in dry season at village ponds

As most of the sightings were in village ponds or the municipal authority maintained lakes, conservation through habitat Improvement is recommended by providing water to these ponds while the ponds are drying out during summer months. Even though some overland movements of these turtles are reported in response to either drought conditions, or increased water depth during the rainy season. In the latter instance, turtles reported to move overland into shallow pools; when these dry up they move back into the larger, permanent sites. Turtles move overland, burrow, and estivate when shallow ponds and lakes dry up in the summer months (peak in May); larger sites may go dry in later months if drought conditions persist into the monsoon seasons (Bhupathy etal, 2014)

The Conservation measures recommended through education and awareness programme are as follows

• Education programs should be implemented to inform local populations and fishermen of the usefulness of these turtles in consuming carrion and their negligible effect as predators on active healthy fish.

• Some conservation effort is required to restrict wholesale commercial exploitation, and especially the collecting of eggs and gravid females during the nesting season.




• The major threat in this part of Gujarat is increasing manual fishing in dry season at village ponds, the education and awareness programme will improve the survival of these turtle caught in the nets.

Source of Information:

1. Turtle trade in India a study of tortoise and turtle WWF-India

2. Bhupathy etal ( 2014) Lissemys punctata (Bonnaterre 1789) – Indian Flapshell Turtle in Conservation Biology of Fresh water turtles and tortoise © 2014 by Chelonian Research Foundation • Published 20 February 2014

3.14.7.9.3Conservation Plan for Asian Woolly Neck Stork, White-Necked Stork, Woolly-Necked Stork (Ciconia Episcopus) (Iucn Categorized Vulnerable Species)

Red List Category & Criteria: Vulnerable A2cd+3cd+4cd ver 3.1 Year Published: 2017

Date Assessed: 2016-10-01

Assessor(s): BirdLife International

Figure No 3-15: Woolly Necked Stork





The woolly-necked stork is a large bird, typically 85 cm tall. It is glistening black with black "skull cap", white neck and white lower belly. The upper parts are glossed dark green, and the breast and belly have a purple hue.It has long red legs and heavy blackish bill. Sexes are alike. Juvenile birds are duller versions of the adult

Range Description

Wooly Necked strok (Ciconia episcopus) is found patchily across South Asia and South East Asia. Its range extends from Pakistan (where it is now very rare) through India, lowland Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh and south-east through Myanmar, Thailand, Lao, Cambodia, Viet Nam, Peninsular Malaysia, the Philippines, and Sumatra and Java, Indonesia.

The overall population is suspected to be in rapid decline, although this is largely a result of substantial declines in South-East Asia (J. W. Duckworth in litt. 2013, R. J. Timmins in litt. 2013, F. Goes in litt. 2014), with populations in South Asia appearing to be stable (Praveen J. in litt. 2014, S. Subramanya in litt. 2014), and other populations with unknown trends (Wetlands International 2014).

EcologyBehavior

This species is predominantly sedentary. In India the species tends to breed during the rains (between July and September in the south and December to March in the north), The species breeds in solitary pairs, and loose colonies of up to 4-5 nests are occasionally reported When not breeding the species is normally seen solitarily or in pairs, rarely in small flocks

Habitat

The species shows a preference for natural wetland habitats in savanna and grassland, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, water-holes, lagoons, dams, flood plains, marshes, and freshwater and peat swamp forests although it will also use artificial habitats such as rice paddy-fields, flooded pastures, cultivated fields (golf courses, firebreaks and roads in tree and sugar-cane plantations (particularly when they are flooded) .It generally forests, but is occasionally found in light woodland or forest clearings. It also frequents coastal mudflats or coral reefs mangrove swamps and estuaries.

In India the species tends to breed during the rains (Hancock et al. 1992) (between July and September in the south and December to March in the north). The species breeds in solitary pairs (del Hoyo et al. 1992). When not breeding the species is normally seen solitarily or in pairs, but will gather in flocks up to at least 80 at permanent natural or man-made wetlands in dry landscapes (del Hoyo et al. 1992, Pande et al. 2007).

Diet:

The species is predominantly carnivorous, its diet consisting of fish, frogs, toads, snakes, lizards, large insects and larvae.

Breeding site:

The nest is a large stick platform built 10-30 m (and sometimes up to 50 m) above the ground or over water, on a fork of a horizontal branch in a tall tree.

Habitat in the study area: Wooly necked stork was sighted forging among the Rice cultivation near Vinzol Village in the study

area.




Location details of Wooly Necked storksighting in the study area

Habitat Nearest village Distance from Project site inKm

Coordinates Number

Water looged region Vinzol 0.94 220 57’ 06.6”, 720

38’ 32.1”:

2

Figure No 3-16: Location of Woolly Necked Stork

Threats The main threat to this species in India is severe habitat fragmentation. The species has also suffered population reductions as a result of habitat destruction and shooting (Hancock et al. 1992).In Nepal, the species is threatened by habitat loss and degradation, hunting, disturbance and possibly the use of agro-chemicals (H. Baral and C. Inskipp in litt. 2014).

Conservation Actions: Above study of Wooly necked stork indicates that proposed project will not have any significant impact on this stork in terms of their normal movement, activities and habitat. However it is necessary to take some management option like habitat improvement in the surrounding areas of project site.

As this stork has assigned the vulnerable threat category in 2017 IUCN RED LIST due to the population decline, it is required to carry out a coordinated survey to assess the total population size and trend of theses stork in the study area especially in Ahmedabad district.

Conservation Actions Recommended:

As most of the sightings were near in water logged region in privately owned agriculture fields Conservation through Habitat Improvement is not recommended. Hence the Conservation measures recommended isthrough education and awareness programme




Conservation through and awareness Education and Training:

Public education programs involving this stork along with Sarus crane with more emphasis on the importance of wetland conservation and sustainable use of wetland resources. Develop local school programs that focus on the biology of cranes and stork, threats to them, minimizing of human impacts, and prevention of egg-stealing and chick-capturing. Support farmer education and extension programs to improve farm practices and to provide information about sustainable agricultural practices and the importance of wetlands. Source: BirdLife International. 2017. Ciconia episcopus (amended version of 2016 assessment). The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species 2017: Downloaded on 19 June 2018.

3.14.7.9.4 Conservation measures for House sparrow:

Moreover, small wooden nest boxes shall be provided in trees in the project premises, to attract small birds especially House sparrows, whose number has been drastically reduced due to the impact of urbanization, and industrial development.World Sparrow Day can be celebrated on March 20 every year with the participation of society, to use it as a platform to highlight the need to conserve sparrows .

3.15 Socioeconomic 3.15.1 Objective

Socio economic study has been carried out to assess the possible impact on surroundingfrom the project site. On the basis of assessment one can also provide mitigation measures for that.In addition, socio economic study also provides direction for the Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) activities and gives clear picture about the areas of intervention for the improvement by CER activities to the project proponent. Socio economic study also provides opportunity to compare data with one another and identify gap in the source data.The main objective of the study is to conduct demographic analysis for villages/towns coming in the radial distance of 10 km using available census data to describe inference related to demographic, social and economic conditions of the region and to conduct the social impact assessment in context to upcoming said project of M/s Meghmani LLP. Further it also narrate the social development program identified and would be undertaken by the company.

3.15.2 Methodology

The study was conducted as under:

Primary Survey: The project site is within the premises and construction work has not yet started with respect to proposed plant, the Social Impact Assessment (primary survey) was done by having detailed discussion with the proponent and villagers in surrounding villages coming under core area using QFSIA Format.

Secondary Survey: Secondary data analysis of socio- economic census data (secondary survey) by referring 2001census data, and web portal like census 2011.co.in. It is to be noted that in the absence of village amenities data for 2011, the exact status of amenities are confirmed by respective village /town panchayat office for the villages/towns coming in the radial distance of 10 km and the talukas and district amenities status were taken from census 2001 using QFSE Format.

Planning of Social Development Program under CER (Primary Survey) planning done on the basis of primary survey and secondary data analysis. Major Focus area of intervention through CER activities has been identified on the basis of primary data and secondary data analysis.




3.15.3 Outcomes of Socio economic study

The major finding of this analysis includes (a) Social Impact Assessment, (b) Demographic Analysis and (c) Planning Corporate Social Responsibility activities. The details are as described following sub-heads.

3.15.4 Primary Survey

Objective

∼ To assess possible impacts of project ∼ To know the exact status of amenities in the absence of information in the census hand

book. ∼ To know the people’s opinion about the project. ∼ To compare QFSIA data with the Census data for the assurance of having quality data for the

analysis. ∼ To identify focus area for the CER activities.

Scope

∼ Primary survey has the scope to determine possible impact on the surrounding villages through project

∼ Site processing. Through the site visit one can evaluate the procedure and identify possible impact within project site premises and for the negative impact mitigation measure also there to minimize the impact. Primary survey has the scope to confirm the quality of data by comparing primary data with secondary data.

Methdology:

∼ Direct observation at project site of M/s. Meghmani Dyes & Intermediates LLP, Vatva and discussion with company’s representative (Project manager and EHS manager).

∼ Primary survey had been done through 1) One to one interaction with the village stake holders, 2) Focus group discussion (FGD), 3) Need assessment for the CER activities and FGD is given in summarized point.

3.15.4.1 Major outcomes of primary survey:

The following observations were made while discussing with the villagers through focus group discussion and reviewing CER activity and usingQFSIAformat:

(a). General Field Observation

• Some of the surrounding area likeIsanpur, Kankariya, Asrva,Ramol,Vatva,Nandej,Hathijan comes under municipal corporation zone area. So, these areas have good availabilities of basic amenities like water, Electricity, Drainage.

• Primary survey had been conducted in 13 villages. In all these villages primary data was collected to compare with the secondary data, also done need assessment in these villages to list out the CER activities.




(b). Social Education Amenities

Table 3-32: Social Education Amenities

Sr.No. Villages 1 to 5KM 5 to 10 KM 10 Above

PS HS HSS C I PS HS HSS C I PS HS HSS C I 1 Chasmaniya 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 Vaanch 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 Ramol 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Jetalpur 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 Hathijan 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 6 Badodara 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 7 Nandej 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 8 Devadi 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 9 Chosar 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

10 Rorda 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 Gamdi 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 12 Vizol 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 13 Aslali 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Total no. of villages

13 13 13 12 04 02 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 1 5 6

Primary School= P S/ High School=H S/ High Secondery school= H S S/ College= C/ ITI= I (Source: QFSIA format filled based on information provided byvillagers during filed visit / one to one interaction session).

• All the villages have the facility of Primary school under the government “SarvaSikshaAbhiyan” Scheme.

• 13 villages have the secondary school and 12 villages have the higher secondary school within 5km area which may help to maintain lower percentage of drop out students during their schooling.

• Out of total 13 villages 04 villages have the facility of college and 02 villages have the facility of ITI within 5km area.

(c). Health Facilities

Table 3-33: Health Facilities of the study area Sr.No. Area 1 to 5KM 5 to 10 KM 10 KM & Above

A Govt Health Facility

PP A Govt Health Facility

PP A Govt Health Facility

PP

1 Chasmaniya 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 Vaanch 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Ramol 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Jetalpur 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 Hathijan 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 6 Badodara 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 Nandej 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 Devadi 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 Chosar 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 Rorda 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 Gamdi 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 Vizol 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 Aslali 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0




Total Villages

13 13 12 12 0 1 1 0 0 0

(Source: QFSIA Format filled through Villages visits).

Note: Aganwadi=A/ Sub-centre=SC/Primary Health Centre=PHC/CHC/Private practitioner=PP

• All the villages have Aganwadi within 5 km area. Agranwadi is very strong network to regulate government programmes for pregnant mothers, Infant child nutrition’s, vaccination etc. so, availability of this facility is very much important for the villagers.

• 12 villages have the government health facility and private practitioner within 5 km area which is good for the emergency situations. As all the government health facilities are providing health treatment at very economical rates, it is very much useful for the

economical weaker section.

(d). Villages infrastructure

Table 3-34 : Villages infrastructure

Area 1 to 5KM 5 to 10 KM 10 KM & Above PB

PDS

Bank

ST bus

SL PO

PB

PDS

Bank

ST bus

SL

PO

PB

PDS

Bank

ST bus

SL

PO

Chasmaniya

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Vaanch 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ramol 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Jetalpur 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hathijan 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Badodara 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Nandej 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Devadi 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chosar 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rorda 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gamdi 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Vizol 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Aslali 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total No.Villages

13

13

12 13 13 13

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Source: QFSIA format filled based on information provided byvillagers during filed visit / one to one interaction session).

Note: Panchayat Building=PB/ PDS=PD/ Bank=B /ST Bus service= ST/ Street Light=SL /Post office=PO

• All the villages have Panchayat building, PanditDindayal scheme shop, Bank within 5 km area which is very good as because PanditDindayalration shop is providing rationing at very minimal prices to the BPL card holder (who comes under poverty line) and having bank within 5km range is also make villagers to get their government scheme benefit easily because now government providing all the cash benefit through DBT scheme (Direct benefit transfer) to beneficiary bank account.

• 13 the villages have ST bus stand and 13 have the Post office and Street light accessibility within 5 km area.




(e). Summary of Social Amenities

Table 3-35 : Summary of Social Amenities Area Education Health Facilities Village infrastructure

PS HS HSS C I A Govt. Health Facility

PP PB PDS Bank ST bus

SL PO

Accessibility of Amenities in Villages Within 05 KM

100%

100%

92 %

30%

15%

100

%

92 %

92%

100%

92 %

100 %

100%

100%

100%

Vatva 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(Source: QFSIA format filled based on information provided byvillagers during filed visit / one to one interaction session).

Note: *Above table showing the accessibility of amenities in villages within 05 KM. *In Vatvavillage 1 indicating Availability and 0 Non-availability.




(f). Occupational Pattern:

Table 3-36 : Occupational Pattern:

Major Occupational Pattern (No. Of Population engaged in) Supplementary Pattern

Sr. No.

Sample Villages Population Cultivator/Farmer Agriculture Laborer

Casual Labor

Industrial Labour

Service Sector Petty Business

Animal Husbandary

Govt Private 1 Chasmaniya 1000 700 0 0 100 50 50 100 800 2 Vaanch 4000 2000 800 800 80 200 120 1600 3 Ramol 10,000 2500 0 0 5000 500 500 1000 5000 4 Jetalpur 8000 6000 400 0 1200 0 400 0 2800 5 Hathijan 1500 150 150 150 600 0 300 150 75 6 Badodara 2700 1350 270 270 540 0 0 270 1620 7 Nandej 12000 6000 0 1200 1200 0 1200 2400 3600 8 Devadi 3000 300 300 300 600 0 1200 300 300 9 Chosar 4000 1200 800 400 800 200 200 400 2000

10 Rorda 800 40 0 0 560 40 80 80 400 11 Gamdi 1500 750 300 0 225 0 75 150 150 12 Vizol 5000 500 500 0 3500 250 0 500 5000 13 Aslali 10000 2500 0 0 5000 0 500 2000 500

Total 63500 23990 3520 2320 20125 1120 4705 7470 23845 (Source: QFSIA Format filled through Villages visits.)

• According to stake holders opinion Ramol area has the highest number of population. • Jetalpur Village has the highest number of farmers engaged in farming. • Vaanch village has highest number of Agriculture labour whereas Nandejhas highest number of casual labour. • Vaanch and Aslali have the highest number of Industrial labour, in service sector & private sector, also in petty business. • Vizol and Ramol has highest population engaged in Animal husbandary

• Average 37.77% people mostly from rural area engaged in Agriculture activity. Project proponent can spread education about various modern scientific method of farming, different ways of rain water harvesting amongst this section of people through IEC material, Projector presentation during panchayat meetings.




• Estimated 31.69 % people work in industries as labour. Project proponent can increase skill of this group of people through skill development programme and technical training seminars. So, this section worker could get appropriate position in the industries on the basis of their skill and

technical knowledge.

• Only 15% Villages have the facility of Industrial training institute (ITI), this poor percentage of availability of ITI facility is not enough to motivate students to get in to the skill development sector. So, project proponent should make arrangement for the students for their skill development through implementing government schemes like “Skill India” & PMKEY.

Recommended CER activities:

Education:

• 30% villages have the accessibility of college within 5km area. So there is large possibility of dropout of girl students because non availability of college after completing school education. So, project proponent should ensure the availability of transportation for such kind of students Groups.

Health: • 92 % villages have the accessibility government health facility which is good percentage to assess the

availability, but it still should increase just to ensure that each one can get good health treatment. So, Project proponent can make arrangement of medical van or scheduling health camp for those villages that has not facility within village for the regular check-up of villages and avoid chances of epidemic prevalence.

Social Infrastructure: • Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation had constructed good number of public toilets in the areas

likeVatva, but these all areas are highly populated so available toilets are still not enough, so project proponent can construct public toilets to contribute in clean India campaign.

(g). Field Observation through Various Activities

• Some of the common purposes of interaction with villages stake holders were to carry out comparative study between secondary data of Villages, availability of amenities in villages, understand priority for CER activities.

Figure 3-17: One to one interaction with Village stake holders

(Plate-A): Interaction during visit at Ramol village (Plate-B): Interaction during visit at Jetalpur village




(Plate-C): Interaction during visit at Hathijan village (Plate-D): Interaction during visit at Vaanch village

(Plate-E): Interaction during visit at Gamdi village (Plate-F): Interaction during visit at Ropda village

(Plate-G): Interaction during visit at Aslalivillage




Facilities physical verification during field visit to identify gap in availability of Amenities

VaanchAganvadi Kendra Gatrad Milk Dairy

Memadpur Primary School Aslali Bus stand

Nandej Post office

Gamdi Gram Panchayat




3.15.5 Scondary Survey (Secondary Data) 3.15.5.1 Scope

Industrial establishment may have some adverse effect on surrounding eco-system, so it’s been necessary to identify those impacts and also provide mitigation measures to minimize those impacts. Project site secondary details also provides road map for the CER (Corporate environment responsibility) activities. Project site secondary details gives the clear picture of accessibility of basic facilities and on the basis of amenities availability data one can do need assessment and can recommend certain intervention to project proponent under the ESC (Enterprise social commitment).

3.15.5.2 Objective

• Main objective of secondary data to collect the information of surrounding villages to assess the impact of economic activity on society or surrounding community.

• To confirm the available amenities within villages.

• To identify gap in available amenities and to decide focus area of CER activities for the project proponent.

• To compare primary data with the secondary data for the better data analysis this may certainly help in forming CER activities for the surrounding villagers.

3.15.5.3 Socio Economic Layout

Project site 10 Km redius area covered Aahmedabad District. Having the Corporation area of Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation and Daskroi taluka. Area like Isanpur, Vatva, Nikol, Kankariya, Saraspur, Asarva, Ramol, Hathijan comes under Ahmedabad municipal corporation zone area and remainning 20 villages comes under Daskroi taluka.

3.15.5.4 Demography

Table 3-37 : Demography

Sr. No Demographic Information

Gujarat State Ahmedabad 2001 2011 2001 2011

1 Total Population 50671017 60383628 5816519 7214225 2 Decadal Population Growth Rate 22.48 19.28 27.25 24.03 3 Density of population (Per Sq km) 258 308 719 890 4 Sex Ratio 920 919 892 904 5 Total Literacy Rate 69.14 78.03 79.50 85.31 6 Male Literacy Rate 79.66 85.75 87.31 90.74 7 Female Literacy Rate 57.80 69.68 70.83 79.35

(Source:Gujarat Sate& Ahmedabad District Census Handbook 2011.)

Analytical Note:

• Gujarat state has 1.19% population increment during the year 2001 to 2011 while Ahmedabad had witnessed 1.24% during same period of time.

• Ahmedabad district has more population growth than the gujarat state. • Gujarat state has more sex ratio than ahmedabad district. • Ahmedabad district has more literacy rate than the gujarat state. • Ahmedabad has more literacy rate in female poplation than gujarat state.




3.15.5.5 Comparative Demographic Information at Macro Level (2011)

Table 3-38 : Comparative Demographic Information at Macro Level (2011) Sr. No.

Demographic Information (2011) State District

Gujarat Ahmedabad 1 Total Area (in Sq. km) 196024 8107 2 Total Population 60439692 7214225 3 Decadal Population Growth Rate (2001-2011) Total 19.28 24.03 4 Density of population (Per Sq. km) 308 890 5 Sex Ratio (Females per 000' males) Total 919 905

5a Rural 949 933 5b Urban 880 899 5 Child Sex ratio 890 857 6 Rural 949 894 7 Urban 880 848 8 Proportion Literate 78.03 85.31

8a Male Proportion Literate 85.75 90.74 8b Female Proportion literate 69.68 79.35 9 Work Participation rate (Main + Marginal Workers) 40.98 35.97

(Source: Gujarat State Census Book 2011; AhmedabadDistrict Census Handbook 2011l page 18) Analytical Note:

• Ahmedabad is smaller in geographic area than the gujarat state. • Ahmedabad district having more population growth rate than the gujarat state. • Ahmedabad district has more density than the gujarat state. • Gujarat has more number of child numbers than ahmedabad district. • Ahmedabad has more popualtion literacy propotion than the gujarat state. • Gujarat state has more work participation rate than the ahmedabad district.

Figure No :3-18 -Comparative Demographic Status of Gujarat Sate & Ahmedabad district.

T O T A L A R E A ( I N S Q . K M )

T O T A L P O P U L A T I O N

D E C A D A L P O P U L A T I O N G R O W T H R A T E ( 2 0 0 1 - …

D E N S I T Y O F P O P U L A T I O N ( P E R S Q . K M )

S E X R A T I O ( F E M A L E S P E R 0 0 0 ' M A L E S ) …

R U R A L

U R B A N

C H I L D S E X R A T I O

…

…

P R O P O R T I O N L I T E R A T E

M A L E P R O P O R T I O N L I T E R A T E

F E M A L E P R O P O R T I O N L I T E R A T E

W O R K P A R T I C I P A T I O N R A T E ( M A I N + …

196024

60439692

19.28

308

919

949

880

890

949

880

78.03

85.75

69.68

40.98

8107

7214225

24.03

890

905

933

899

857

894

848

85.31

90.74

79.35

35.97

TABLE 1.2 CHART

State District




3.15.5.6Overview of Ahmedbad economic Activity:

• Ahmedabad is an industrial base for sectors such as chemicals, textiles, drugs, pharmaceuticals and agro & food processing industries. Textiles and chemicals are major sectors of investments and employment. Presence of AHMEDABAD TEXTILE INDUSTRY’SRESEARCH ASSOCIATION (ATIRA) the largest association for textile research and allied industries in India has helped district in becoming a thriving textile centre.

• Details of the economic status for study region are given in table 3-39 the occupational pattern of workers in the study region is given in table 3-40.

Table 3-39 : Percentage of main workers, marginal workers and non- workers

Type of Area

% of Worker Population from Total Population

% of Main Worker Population from Total Worker Population

% of Marginal Worker Population from Total Worker

Population

% of Non-Worker Population from Total Population

Total Male Female Total Male Female Total Male Female Total Male Female Ahmedabad 34.99 55.94 11.70 32.29 53.06 9.19 2.71 2.88 2.51 65.01 44.06 88.30

Daskroi 38.04 57.99 16.97 31.38 52.95 8.58 6.66 5.03 8.38 61.96 42.01 83.03 Ahmedabad City 34.98 55.94 11.64 32.36 53.16 9.20 2.62 2.79 2.44 65.02 44.05 88.36

Note: T = Total, M = Male, F = Female; AVERAGE worker for each category in villages is calculated by dividing workers from number of villages (Source: Ahmedabad District Census Handbook 2011 page 101,104,105)

Analytical Note:

• Ahmedabad district and Ahmedabad city having same number of total population in total workers which is more than then Daskroi taluka while Daskroi having more total worker population in female worker population.

• Ahmedabad city has more main worker than the ahmedabad district and Daskroi taluka. • Daskroi has more marginal worker than the ahmedabad city and ahmedabad taluka. • Ahmedabad city has more Non worker population than the Ahmedabad district and Daskroi taluka.




Table 3-40 : Occupational pattern (industrial categories of main workers)

Type of Area

No. of inhabited Villages

(Average) Cultivator (Average) Agriculture Laborers (Average) Manufacturing

processing, servicing repairs in household industry

(Average) Other workers

T M F T M F T M F T M F

Ahmedabad 506 25.11 30.61 10.86 49.73 41.05 69.68 1.17 1.08 1.43 23.98 26.27 18.03

Daskroi 54 24.93 28.96 10.38 36.90 31.20 57.48 1.15 1.03 1.56 37.02 38.81 30.59

Ahmedabad city 0 0.71 0.57 1.42 0.68 0.58 1.18 2.29 1.58 6.12 96.32 97.27 91.28

Note: T = Total, M = Male, F = Female; AVERAGE worker for each category in villages is calculated by dividing workers from number of villages

(Source: Ahmedabad District Census Handbook 2011 page 102, 103)

Analytical Note: • Ahmedabad has more cultivator than Daskroi taluka and ahmedabad city. • Ahmedabad district has also more people in agriculture labourer than Daskroi and Ahmedabad city. • Ahmedabad city has more population in house hold industry than Ahmedabad district and Daskroi. • Ahmedabad city has more workers in other section than Daskroi and Ahmedabad district.




3.15.6Socio Economic Amenities:

Social economic aminities data played vital role for the need asessemnt in the surrounding villages from project site 10km radios area. It provides definate direction for the formation of CSR intervention in the villages.Below table showcasing the aminities availbale in Ahmedabad district, Ahmedabad city and Daskroi taluka. Table 3-41 : Status of different amenities in District and taluka of Study region.

Area No. of Inhabited Villages

Availability of water from various sources Availability of Electricity

Latrine Availability of Drainage

( closed+ Open drainage)

Drinking water (Tap water

From Treated Source)

Covered well

Hand pump

Tube well

Other Sources

Having Facility of

Latrine within

premises

Public latrine

No latrine within

premises

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Ahmedabad 506 67.07 0.77 1.52 10.58 0.88 97.42 83.02 3.65 31.31 79.66 Ahmedabad City 0 78.63 0.06 1.46 11.12 0.59 98.6 93.37 4.19 2.44 93.45 Daskroi 54 27.77 0.35 0.18 15.09 1.31 95.31 58.58 1.21 40.21 49.46 (Source: Ahmedabad District Census Book 2011 page 482-488)

Analytical Note:

• Daskori taluka having lowest sorece of traeted drinking water. • Daskori talika having lowset percentage in availiblity of electricity. • Daskori lauka having lowset availiblity of latrine facility. • Daskori taluka having lowset availiiblity of drainage system for the safe disposal of wastage.

3.15.7 Village wise Demographic Details.

Total 21 villages and area of ahmedabad municipal corporation fall under study region and project site surrounding area.

Area like Isanpur, Vatva, Nikol, Kankariya, Saraspur, Asarva, Ramol comes under Ahmedabad municipal corporation zone area; that’s why Ahmedabad municipal corporation zone study having equal imporatance like any other surrounding villages. The villageswise amenties details in the 10 km radius could be seen in Table no. 3-42




Table No.3-42: Village wise demographic details

(Source: www.census2011.co.in)

Sr. No.

TOTAL POPULATION POPULATION 0 TO 06 (years age) Literates Work Profile NAME OF

VILLAGES IN 10 KM

Total Males Females Total Males Females Total Males Females Total Main Marginal workers

1. Ahmedabad M Corp.

67462 35810 31652 8786 4590 4196 42723 25021 17702 26638 23259 3379

2 Vaanch 6674 3438 3236 942 509 433 5296 3062 2234 2523 1813 710 3 Jetalpur 6516 3411 3105 820 440 380 5398 3028 2370 2113 1959 154 4 Hathijan 8214 4267 3947 1144 - - 5625 3219 2406 - - - 5 Badodara 3176 1611 1565 475 238 237 2704 1464 1240 1011 881 130 6 Nandej 9176 4780 4396 1179 0 0 7867 4050 3817 3200 2764 436 7 Devadi 2830 1474 1356 366 193 173 2209 1303 906 1033 978 55 8 Chosar 2328 1217 1111 293 154 139 1900 1081 819 1053 675 378 9 Ropda 1228 652 576 195 109 86 932 578 354 508 488 20

10 Gamdi 1533 798 735 193 100 93 1224 710 514 600 547 53 11 Vizol(Kheda) 1955 1001 954 241 131 110 1523 912 611 648 572 76 12 Aslali 8214 4267 3947 1144 595 549 6535 3740 2795 2854 2602 252 13 Barejdi 1602 807 795 209 106 103 1312 721 591 707 556 151 14 Bibipur 1160 592 568 166 85 81 1053 576 477 422 356 66 15 Singarva

( MT) 12547 6590 5957 0 0 0 10194 5831 4363 4511 4063 447

16 Dhamatvan 5782 2968 2814 848 473 375 4494 2590 1904 1812 1479 333 17 Gatrad 5560 2813 2747 819 423 396 4561 2509 2052 1658 1616 42 18 Geratpur 2021 1061 960 220 115 105 1795 1002 793 723 653 70 19 Memadpur 1520 781 739 241 125 116 1174 694 480 559 378 181 20 Hirapur 4559 2312 2247 660 339 321 3300 1949 1351 1698 1661 37 21 Istolabad 1237 652 585 220 131 89 834 526 308 462 363 99

Total 15594 81302 73992 19161 8856 7982 112653 64566 48087 54733 47663 7069

http://www.census2011.co.in/�




Analytical Note:

• Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having the highest population amongst all the villages and singarva CT region. • All the villages including Ahmedabad Municipal corporation region having less number of 0-6 years age girl child than boy child. • Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having the highest literate population amongst all the villages and singarva CT region. • Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having highest number of population engaged in marginal workers who supposed to have most uncertainty in

employment.

Table No. 3-43 :Village wise Available Amenities Status

Yes= Availability No= Non- Availability, A= <5, B 5-10, C= 10-15 KM (Source: Ahmedabad District Census handbook Book 2011 page 262-280)

Sr. No.

VILLAGES IN 10 km Govt Primary School

Govt Vocational

Training School/ITI

Community Health Centre

Primary Health Centre

Tap Water

treated

Community Toilet

Post Office

Public Bus

Service

Commercial Bank

Cooperative Bank

Agricultural Credit

Societies

Self - Help

Group

Anganwadi Power Supply

For Domestic

Use

PDS

1 Ahmedabad Mun.Corp

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2 Vaanch 5 C b C 1 No C Yes B A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

3 Jetalpur 3 C C 1 Yes C Yes B B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Badodara 3 C C A Yes No B Yes A A C Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 Devadi 2 C C A Yes No A Yes C C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 Chosar 3 C C B Yes No C Yes B B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Ropda 1 C B B Yes No C Yes B B C Yes Yes Yes C

10 Gamdi 1 C C B Yes No A Yes B B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Aslali 3 C C 1 Yes No Yes Yes B B C Yes Yes Yes C 13 Barejdi 1 C C A Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes C Yes Yes Yes C 14 Bibipur 1 C C C Yes No C Yes C C A C Yes Yes C 16 Dhamatvan 4 C B C Yes No C Yes B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 17 Gatrad 3 C B B Yes No B Yes B B B Yes Yes Yes Yes 18 Geratpur 2 C C B Yes No C Yes B C B Yes Yes Yes Yes 19 Memadpur 1 C C C Yes No C Yes C C C Yes Yes Yes C 20 Hirapur 2 C C B Yes No B Yes B B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 21 Istolabad 2 C C B Yes No A Yes A A A Yes Yes Yes A

Total No. of Villages having availability of amenities within 5km village.

21 1 1 5 21 1 7 20 4 6

10 20 21 21 16




Analytical Note:

All the area fall under study region having facility of primary school in which children can exercise their basis right as “Right to education”

Only Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having the facility of Industrail Trainning institute.

Only Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having facility of CHC and 5 villagesg having the facility of Primary health center.

Only Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation having facility of CHC and 5 villagesg having the facility of Community toilet.

Respectively 4,6 and 10 Villagesg have the facility of Commercial bank, Cooperative and Agriculture Credit society facility.

All the villages having regular power supply and aganvadi centers within their villlage.

16 Villagesg having facility of PDS (Ration shop) within their villages. 3.15.8 Planning of Socio Economic Development/Welfare Activities

Based on the field observation (Primary survey) and secondary data about the socio–economic situation for 21 Villages located in the radial distance of 10 km from project site, the following socio‐ economic development/welfare activities under Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) programme are suggested/ recommended.

Establishment of treated water sources.

Promote government schemes amongst the community for their linkage with the government electrification schemes like “UjjvalaYojna”

Help villagers in building up private latrine as well as public latrine facility, Project proponent can work on this in Ahmedabad city also as city also having very low percentage of availability of public latrine 4.19%.

Project proponent can help villagers in networking drainage facility within villages.

THE TOTAL COST OF EXPANSION IS RS.16 CRORE AND ABOUT 2% (IN WHICH 1% AS PER MOEFCC‐ OFICE MEMORANDUM (OM) DATED 1ST MAY 2018 AND 1% AS PER THE MINISTRY’S OFFICE MEMORANDUM 31ST OCTOBER, 2019 REGARDING PROJECTS LOCATED IN CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA DOUBLE THE CER WILL BE ALLOCATED) (RS. 32 LAKH) THEY HAVE ALLOCATED FOR CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY (CER) PROGRAMMES FOR SOCIO ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT / WELFARE ACTIVITIES.

The details pertaining to CER activities with implementation schedule for the next five years with budget are highlighted underSection 2.19 of Chapter‐2


AnticipatedEnvironmentalImpactsandMitigation Measures


Chapter 4. AnticipatedEnvironmentalImpactsandMitigation Measures

4.1 Impact Identification

Identification of significant environmental impact is essential in the preparation of EIA report, an attempt has been made here through the use of "Activity Effect" matrix and “Delphi Technique”.

4.2 IdentificationMatrix

Impact Identification Matrix is given in the Table4-1 and Table 4-2. Various activities belonging to industrial project have been grouped and arranged in rows. The environmental factors, which are being potentially impacted, have been arranged in columns. A preliminary scrutiny has been done and the cells, which fall at the junction of the "Activity" and "Factor" that have possible interaction with each other, have been crossed.The Matrix, thus, establishes the possible "cause-effect" relationship and identifies the environmental factors being impacted and activities responsible for the same.Operational phase is important as it generates long-term impact as the production starts.

This phase includes following activities:

Raw Material Storage Product Manufacturing Product Storage Employment

Transportation Gaseous emission Occasional equipment failure

Table 4-1: Prediction of impacts “cause-effect” relationship (during construction phase)

Parameter Activity

Air Water Noise Soil Flora Fauna Socio Economic

Health & Safety

Site cleaning √ - √ √ √ √ - √ Excavation √ - √ √ √ √ - √ Construction √ √ √ √ √ √ - √ Installation of equipments √ - √ - - - - √ Transportation √ - √ √ √ √ - √ Material handling √ - - - - - - √ Employment - - - - - - √ √ Greenbelt development √ √ √ √ √ √ - √

Table 4-2: Prediction of impacts “cause-effect” relationship (during operation phase)

Parameter Activity

Air Water Noise Soil Flora Fauna Socio Economic

Health & Safety

Raw material storage & handling √ - √ - - - - √ Production √ - √ - - - - √ Product storage and handling - - √ - - - - √ Transportation √ - √ √ √ √ - √ Gaseous emission √ - √ √ √ √ - √ Solid waste generation - √ - √ - - - √ Employment - - - - - - √ √ Infrastructure development - - - - - - - √ Greenbelt development √ √ √ √ √ √ - √




4.3 Impact Identification by Integration

Scenario of the potential impact assessment of proposed proposal also carried out by using another accredited practice/technique. Details are as described under.

Technique: For sitting of an activity, “Delphi Technique” is advised by MoEF. The Government of India has recommended this technique in the book on siting of Hazardous Waste Disposal Areas, prepared by NEERI, Nagpur and published by the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF) in 1991.

The same is proposed to be used with due improvisation, mutatis mutandis, covering other media of environment.

1. (i) The Delphi Technique considers the following 34 attributes and four weight-ages i.e.:

7 attributes, receptor related 10 attributes, pathway related 8 attributes, pollutant related 9 attributes, waste management related.

(ii) The Modified Technique used here considers 23 attributes and five weight-ages i.e.:

7 attributes, receptor related 5 attributes, pathway related 5 attributes, water pollution & waste management related 4 attributes, air pollution and waste management related 2 attributes, solid waste management related.

2. Four types of marks for each attribute like 0 to 0.25, 0.25 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.75 and 0.75 to 1.0 depending on facts of situations, chemical properties of pollutants and quantification are considered. These marks are known as Sensitivity Index (SI).

3. Combined consideration of (1) and (2) together gives attribute-wise weightages. These are the negative marks out of 1000 and ranking of candidate sites is based on comparison of these marks. The attribute measurements or values or descriptions are known as the team has traversed the area. The sensitivity index is awarded based on attribute properties.

The attribute wise score is arrived at by multiplying the sensitivity index and the weight-age of each attribute and is given in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Sensitivity index

Attribute Sensitivity Index 0.0 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.5 0.5 - 0.75 0.75 - 1.0

Receptor Related Population within 500 meters

0 to 100 100 to 250 250 to 1000 > 1000

Distance to nearest drinking water well

> 5000 m 2500 to 5000 m 1000 to 2500 m < 1000 m

Use of site by nearby residents

No used Occasional Moderate Regular

Distance to nearest off site building

> 3000 m 1500 to 3000 m 500 to 1500 m < 500 m

Presence of major transportation routes

Airport Internal road Highway Rail

Land use/ Zoning Completely remote (Zoning not applicable)

Agricultural

Commercial or industrial

Residential




Attribute Sensitivity Index 0.0 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.5 0.5 - 0.75 0.75 - 1.0

Critical environments Not a critical environmental element

Pristine natural areas

Wetlands, flood plains, & preserved areas

Major habitat or endangered or threatened species

Pathway Related Distance to nearest surface water

> 8000 m 1500 to 8000 m 500 to 1500 m < 500 m

Ground water depth > 30 m 15 to 30 m 5 to 15 m < 5 m Type of contamination No contamination Soil contamination

only Biota contamination

Air, water or food contamination

Precipitation effectiveness index

Semi arid Semi humid Humid Wet

Susceptibility to erosion & run-off problem

0 - 0.25 not susceptible

0.25 - 0.50 Potential

0.50 - 0.75 Moderate

0.75 – 1 Severe

Waste Related Water BOD generation level < 250 mg/l 250- 500 mg/l 500- 1000 mg/l Above 1000 Treatability COD-BOD < 2.5 2.5 – 3.5 3.5 - 5 Above 5 Treatment Tertiary Secondary Primary no Disposal Land assured &

crop perennial Land seasonal Stream up to

5km Riparian

pH 6 - 8 5- 6 or 8 - 9 3 - 5 or 9-11 <3 or >11 Air Industrial mix Fuel Electricity Oil Bagasse Coal Control equipment

All including ESP or wet scrubber

Bag filter Cyclone, Fly ash arrestor

None though required

Stacks heights As per Act

30 < 30 None though required

Noise at boundary upto 55 dB(A) 55 to 70 dB(A) 70 to 85 dB(A) Above 85dB(A) Solid Waste Industrial mix (waste type)

None Nonhazardous Hazardous & Non-hazardous

Hazardous

Facilities /Treatment -Non hazardous

Recycle/sale Secured landfill Low landfill None though required

Hazardous Recycle/ Incinerator

Secured landfill Sanitary landfill None though required

And now attribute ranking based on calculation of site sensitivity index (SSI) for proposed project is presented in Table 4-4. Table 4-4: Attribute ranking

Attribute Attribute Measurement Sensitivity Index

Weightage Attribute Score

Receptor Related Population within 500 meters 1000 0.75 80 60.0 Distance to nearest drinking water well, meter

1500

0.75 60 45.0

Use of site by nearby residents No 0.0 50 0.0 Distance to nearest off site building 500 m 1.0 40 40.0 Land use/ Zoning Industrial 0.75 30 22.5




Attribute Attribute Measurement Sensitivity Index

Weightage Attribute Score

Presence of transportation routes Road

Highway 0.75 30 22.5

Critical environments No 0.25 30 7.5 Sub- total (a) 320 197.5

Pathway Related Distance to nearest surface water 2.4 km 0.75 55 41.2 Depth of ground water 15 to 30 m 0.50 45 22.5 Type of contamination Nocontamination 0.0 45 0.0 Precipitation effectiveness index Semi Arid/ Arid 0.25 25 6.25 Susceptibility to erosion and run off problems

Not susceptible 0.25 25 6.25

Sub- total (b) 195 76.2 Waste Related Water BOD, mg/l <250 mg/l 0.25 40 10.0 pH 6 - 8 0.25 20 5.0 Treatability (COD:BOD) <2.5 0.25 40 10.0 Treatment ETP, to CETP, ZLD 0.75 50 37.5 Disposals To CETP, ZLD 0.25 50 12.5 Air Industrial mix (Fuel) Natural Gas/Imported Coal/

Agrowaste 1.0 70 70.0

Control equipment Cyclone Separator, Bag Filter

0.25 50 12.5

Stacks 40 m 0.75 50 37.5 Noise at boundary 55-70 dB(A) 0.50 30 15.0 Solid Waste Mix Non-Hazardousand

Hazardous waste 0.75 45 33.8

Facilities Recycle and HW disposal as per GPCB Norms

0.50 40 20.0

Sub- Total (c) 485 263.8 TOTAL (a+b+c) -- 537.5

Table 4-5: Integration consideration

Score 750 to 1000 = Pollution Potential Very High Score 600 to 750 = Pollution Potential High Score 450 to 600 = Pollution Potential Moderate Score 300 to 450 = Pollution Potential Low Score Below 300 = Pollution Potential Very Low

Since with the methodical working of sensitivity index and weight-ages, the total score of pollution potential has come to 538hence the site fits into “Moderate Pollution Potential” category. The significance of impact assessment of proposed project activity taking in consideration of existing baseline environmental status around project site and pollution potentialof proposed activity with Suggestive Preventive measures for various major environmental components are described under:




4.4 Land Environment

Table 4-6: Impact and mitigation measures on land environment

Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures to be taken

During Construction Phase Construction activity of

the Site: excavation for foundation, clearing, leveling the sites and vehicular movements

Flying dust and construction debris within the premises / near by areas.

Proper sprinkling system is to be adopted to reduce the amount of flying dust. Excavated earth shall be stored in

stockpiles and covered with plastic/ tarpaulin sheets in such a way that it does not affect or reach the railway track (in nearby areas). It will be reused for landscape development along the corridor and in green belt.

Transportation and handling of construction and other raw material

Change in soil structure and texture due to spillage & leakage of fuel if any.

No additional infrastructure is required to be constructed as this is an expansion project and most of the facilities already exist at the site. Transportation of materials will be done

as per CPCB Guidelines. The dumpers will be covered to prevent spillage or dusting. The drivers will be imparted training. The containers / dumpers will be marked with the name, contact details and the other details required.

Disposal of sewage & garbage generated during the construction works from domestic activities of engineers, official & workers

Contamination of land may occur due to the disposal of untreated sewage and domestic waste

Proper sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work will be provided. The sewage willbe will be treated in

sewage treatment plant.

Traffic Handling The vehicular traffic of trucks will increase during the construction phase. Trucks, tankers and other vehicles may cause additional air pollution to the surrounding areas. The effects may be more prominent in close by villages like Vadadla which is less than 2.0 kms on the NE side.

This will be temporary and restricted to construction phase only. However proper traffic management will be followed as per the specified norms.

During Operation Phase Transportation, storage

and handling of other raw material

Change in soil structure and texture due to spillage and leakage of fuel.

No additional infrastructure is required to be constructed as this is an expansion project and most of the facilities already exist at the site. Transportation of hazardous waste will be done as per CPCB Guidelines. The dumpers will be covered to prevent spillage or dusting. The drivers will be imparted training. The containers / dumpers will be marked with the name of




Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures to be taken TSDF, contact details and the other details required.

Traffic Management Trucks, tankers and other vehicles may cause traffic jam outside and within the premises and cause additional air pollution.

In GIDC, a well developed GIDC main road and internal road are made and having carrying capacity to take care of additional traffic due to proposed expansion. Therefore no additional roads will require

to be constructed therefore there will not be any change in landuse of the study area However, Separate entry and exist gate

shall be provided and trained security guards shall be deployed to ensure proper management and movement of vehicles within premises. Internal RCC road along with signboard of

traffic sign will be provided. Traffic rules and discipline shall be strictly

implemented. Speed break bumper shall be provided on

internal road at regular interval to avoid over speed. No vehicles will stop near weigh bridge,

wheel washing area after completion of activities. To prevent Road accident following

precautions to be taken : • Transportation of waste/raw

materials/ products by only authorized vehicles

• Regular training to drivers • Organize awareness program • Implementation of MSDS and TREM

card Air pollution and

Aesthetics within the premises.

Contamination of air will occur due to various air pollutants from the industrial processes within and outside the premises upto10kms in case of failure of APCM systems. The details of the landuse affected is presented in the Air pollution of SO2, PM2.5 and PM10

figures below.

Air pollution control device / measures as given in Chapter2, section 2.11 will be adopted. • As per the air quality modelling results

the percentage of PM, SO2 and NO2

• The recommended plant species also consist of fruiting trees, ornamental flowering plants etc.; which not only attract the birds to proliferate but also improve the site aesthetics as well as control soil erosion. This will turn into permanent land use change.

will be within the limits with APCD measures according to NAAQS (National ambient air quality as per CPCB notification).

• Considering the worst case scenario. If there is any operational failure of Air




Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures to be taken Pollution Control Measures (APCM) the plant will be shut-down.

Hazard and Risk Scenarios

The detailed landuse that might be affected due to the hazard scenarios as mentioned in risk assessment study.

• Emergency control facilities and resources to be plan and rehearsal / Mock- Drill to be conducted regularly to combat emergency in minimum time.

• Proper sealing of the trucks needs to be done during the transportation.

• Also storage space needs to be properly maintained and covered to avoid any kind of pollution in the water body.

Local people will be employed for proposed expansions have their own household facility; therefore there will not be any rehabilitation and resettlement, since the expansion will be carried out within the existing premises) of habitation or migration which can change the landuse pattern of the study area.

4.5 Geology and Soil

Table 4-7: Impact and mitigation measures on geology and soil environment

Activity Environmental Hazard Management Action To Be Taken

During Construction Phase Construction activity of

the Site: Excavation for foundation, clearing, leveling the sites and vehicular movements. Handling of construction and other raw materials.

Change in soil structure and texture due to spillage & leakage of fuel.

• Proposed expansion will be within the existing plant premises located in notified GIDC area, where enough land is available for the activity. Existing paved area & storage facilities will be used during the construction activity.

• Proper sprinkling system is to be adopted to reduce the amount of flying dust.

• Excavated earth shall be stored in stockpiles and covered with plastic/ tarpaulin sheets and reused for landscape development along the corridor and for use in green belt.

• Properly lined/paved area for the works having potential of leakage/spillage of fuel or material like area for Storage of construction and other raw material etc.

Disposal of sewage & garbage generated during the construction works from domestic activities of engineers, official & workers

Contamination of Soil may occur due to the disposal of untreated sewage and domestic waste.

• Provide proper sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work.

• The sewage shall be properly treated/ disposed off through soak pit system.

During Operation Phase Accidents and risk

assessments Changes in soil chemistry

due to addition of foreign material due to system failures and/or accidents.

• In case of accidents mentioned in the risk scenarios proper actions will be taken according to the mitigation measures mentioned in chapter 7: Risk analysis.

Storage, Transportation and

Changes in soil texture will lead to change in

• Properly lined/paved area for the works having potential of leakage/spillage of fuel or




Activity Environmental Hazard Management Action To Be Taken Handling of Construction and other Raw Material and Hazardous Waste

porosity, permeability & other such physical characteristics of soil of the area. Changes in soil chemistry

due to addition of foreign material from polluted air and water due to plant activities in the area.

material like area for Storage of construction and other raw material etc.

• Proper mitigative measures like use of efficient pollution control systems, proper stack height, and use of top soil in plantation results in no significant impact on soil of the core zone. There will be no impact on soil of the study area located beyond the working area of the proposed expansion project.

• Soil samples will be collected and tested at regular intervals from the nearby areas. This will help in mitigation of any harmful impact on soil due to the project activity, if any.

• Transportation of hazardous waste will be done as per CPCB Guidelines. The dumpers will be covered to prevent spillage or dusting. The drivers will be imparted training. The containers/ dumpers will be marked with the name of TSDF where it is to be sent, contact details and the other details required.

4.6 Geohydrology:

During Construction and Operation Phase: As stated above during construction as well as during operation phase, the water requirement will be met through GIDC; therefore no groundwater abstraction will required to be made, details are given in Chapter-2. Therefore, there will be no impact on groundwater.

Storm Water Drainage Facility: storm water drainage facility should be properly maintained to avoid accumulation of rain water during the monsoon seasons.

Table 4-8: Impact and mitigation measures on groundwater hydrology

Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures to be Taken

During Construction Phase

Construction activity of the Site: Excavation for foundation, clearing, leveling the sites and vehicular movements

This is an expansion project within the premises; hence there is no impact on water regime during the construction. The water will be brought through GIDC pipeline and there would be no exploitation of groundwater. However the flying dust and debris may pollute the surrounding environment.

• Proper sprinkling system is to be adopted to reduce the amount of flying dust. The source of water would be through GIDC pipeline.

Washing of construction equipments

Formation of stagnant pools of water if construction equipments are not washed properly at designated washing

• Provision for proper designated area for washing.





area Storage and Disposal of

sewage & garbage generated during the construction works from domestic activities of engineers, official & workers

Contamination of land may occur due to the disposal of untreated sewage and domestic waste. 14 KLD of waste water will

be generatedwhich will be treated in STP and 7 KLD will be reused for flushing and 7KLD will be used for gardening.

• Provide proper sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work.

• The sewage will be disposed off through soak pit system.

• Properly lined/paved area for the works having potential of leakage/spillage of fuel or material like area for Storage of construction and other raw material etc.

Around 25 KLD of water required during the construction for various activities like preparation & mixing of concrete, cooling of construction equipment, usage in spray and sprinklers for dust suppression etc.

No impact is on groundwater regime is anticipated since the water is sourced through GIDC pipeline

• Water requirement shall be met by GIDC. Minimum usage of water is advisable for construction work and care should be taken to avoid wastage of water during the construction phase. Moreover, groundwater will not be drawn for the construction activities; hence no impacts on groundwater resources are anticipated.

Drinking water requirement for the construction worker and other staff.

No ground water is / will be abstracted. Water is obtained from the GIDC and the same will be continued for the expansion activity.

• Proper drinking water facility will be made available to the construction workers.

During Operation Phase

Transportation, Storage and Handling of Construction and other Raw Material

Temporary contamination of groundwater may occur due to leakage and spillages.

• Properly lined/paved area for the works having potential of leakage/spillage of fuel or material like area for storage of raw material etc.

• Transportation of hazardous waste will be done as per CPCB Guidelines. The dumpers will be covered to prevent spillage or dusting. The drivers will be imparted training. The containers / dumpers will be marked with the name of TSDF where it is to be sent, contact details and the other details required.

Additional requirement of water during the operation phase will be 354 KLD

Impact on water resource at the source area from where water is brought to the site.

• Water requirement will met through GIDC.

Discharge of treated effluent from the proposed project

Contamination of groundwater may occur due to existing water level during any kind of accidents or leekage. This will affect villages located around the site andcrops

• Plant water/ wastewater treatment and its conveynacesystem shall be designed and proper monitoring and care shall be taken for effective management of treated effluents.





may also get affected.

4.7 Meteorology

The micro-meteorological data for the region indicates the pre-dominant winds from NE to SW. The average wind speed reported during the study period observed 11.41 kmph. Details are given in Chapter-3. The hourly meteorological data used for prediction of pollutants Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs).

During Construction Phase: During construction there will be slight increase of SPM due to excavation of soil, handling and storage of construction material/waste and transportation, however tarpaulin sheets will be used for barricading and special care will be taken in prevailing downwind direction. During design/ construction of vent/stack; meteorology of the study area should be considered.

During Operation Phase: During operation phase there will be some emissions from stack/ vents/ fugitive emissions/ and adequate APCM will be provided to control mesaures foremissions/ fugitive emissions, details are given Chapter-2.

As well as higher Air Pollution Tolerance (APTI) should be planted in the prevailing downwind direction this will ensure that by the time the unit goes into the production, the trees of the given APTI will be grown enough which act as a barrier for fugitive emissions/odor to accept any accidental release of chemicals.

4.8 Air Environment

The impacts on air quality from any project depends on various factors like design capacity, configuration, process technology, raw material/ fuel used, envisaged emission control measures, operation and maintenance practices. Apart from the above, other activities viz. transportation of raw materials and products, storage facilities and material handling within the plant may also contribute to air pollution.

4.8.1 Dispersion Modeling

• Emissions from all the stacks were analyzed for their impacts on the GLC for various distances using the dispersion modeling guidelines of AERMOD, developed by the AERMIC (American Meteorological Society (AMS)/United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), as directed by CPCB.

4.8.2 About AERMOD:

• AMS/EPA Regulatory Model (AERMOD) is a steady-state plume model. It is designed to apply to source releases and meteorological conditions that can be assumed to be steady over individual modeling periods (typically one hour or less).

• AERMOD has been designed to handle the computation of pollutant impacts in both flat and complex terrain within the same modeling framework.

• The American Meteorological Society/Environmental Protection Agency Regulatory Model Improvement Committee (AERMIC) was formed to introduce state-of-the-art modeling concepts into the EPA's air quality models.

• Through AERMIC, a modeling system, AERMOD, was introduced that incorporated air dispersion based on planetary boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts, including treatment of both surface and elevated sources, and both simple and complex terrain.

• AERMET is an input data processor that is one of the regulatory components of the AERMOD modeling system. It incorporates air dispersion based on planetary boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts.

• Data flow in AERMOD modeling system is shown in Figure- 4.1.




Figure 4-1: Data flow in AERMOD modeling system

4.8.3 MeteorologicalParameters:

• The hourly meteorological data considered were wind speed, wind direction, ambient atmospheric temperature, cloud cover, humidity & rainfall.

4.8.4 Other Assumptions:

• The dispersion modeling assumptions considered are as follows:

∼ The terrain of the study area was considered as FLAT;

∼ Stability class and Atmospheric inversion level is based on software’s database.

• Air quality contours for the various pollutants are given in the Figure-4.2to Figure-4.7Data used for the evaluation of the ground level concentration for the proposed stack/vent is given in Table- 4.9.

• The results of GLCs due to the proposed process stack are given in Table- 4.10to Table- 4.13. When the above stated GLCs results are added into the 98% percentile concentration of ambient air parameters, it gives overall AAQ of the surrounding study area.




Table 4-9: Data used for the evaluation of the ground level concentration Stack

ID Stack

attached to

Location (x,y)

Height (m)

Diameter (m)

Fuel Pollutant Flow Rate (Area x

Velocity)

gm/s (Before APCM)

(Flow Rate x Conc./1000)

gm/s (After APCM) (Flow

Rate x Conc./1000)

Limit Temp K

Velocity APCM APCM Efficiency

A Steam Boiler

(2 TPH)

(-23.63, 59.88)

33 0.5 Natural Gas

SPM 1.374 0.069 -- 150 mg/Nm

423 3

7 Not Applicable

--

NOx 0.052 -- 50 ppm SO 0.036 2 -- 100 ppm

B D. G. Set (1000 KVA)

(-6.30, 72.21)

11 0.15 Natural Gas

SPM 0.194 0.010 -- 150 mg/Nm

338 3

11 Not Applicable

--

NOx 0.007 -- 50 ppm SO 0.005 2 -- 100 ppm

C Steam Boiler

(4 MT/hr )

(-35.33, 73.03)

40 0.5 Imported Coal/ Agro

waste

SPM 1.570 11.775 0.236 150 mg/Nm

443 3

8 Cyclone Separator

& Bag filter

0.98

NOx 0.738 0.148 50 ppm 0.8 SO 2.738 2 0.411 100 ppm 0.85

D Hot air Generator

(20 Lac Kcal)

(-26, 84.02)


waste

SPM 1.766 13.247 0.265 150 mg/Nm

458 3

9 Cyclone Separator

& Bag filter

0.98

NOx 0.830 0.166 50 ppm 0.8

SO 3.080 2 0.462 100 ppm 0.85 E Hot air

Generator (11 Lac Kcal)

(-7.17, 87.55)


waste

SPM 1.431 10.730 0.215 150 mg/Nm

433 3

9 Cyclone Separator

& Bag filter

0.98

NOx 0.672 0.134 50 ppm 0.8 SO 2.495 2 0.374 100 ppm 0.85

F Spray Dryer -1

(-57.88, 76.63)

22 0.75 -- PM 3.091 0.618 0.093 150 mg/Nm

338 3

7 Cyclone Separator followed by Water Scrubber

0.85

G Spray Dryer - 2

(-45.03, 59.48)

22 1 -- PM 5.495 1.099 0.165 150 mg/Nm

338 3

7 Cyclone Separator followed by Water Scrubber

0.85




H Spin Flash Dryer (PNG based- In

Built HAG)

(87.94, -23.09)

15 0.3 -- PM 0.424 0.254 0.013 150 mg/Nm

333 3


0.95

I Spin Flash Dryer (PNG based- In

Built HAG)

(79.40, -39.52)

15 0.3 -- PM 0.424 0.254 0.013 150 mg/Nm

333 3


0.95

J Spray dryer (PNG

based- In Built HAG)

(72.98, 1.69)

21 0.4 -- PM 0.879 0.528 0.026 150 mg/Nm

338 3


0.95

K Spray dryer (0,0) 25 0.75 -- PM 3.091 0.618 0.093 150 mg/Nm

338 3

7 Cyclone Separator followed by two stage Water

Scrubber

0.85




Details of cumulative GLCs (Ground Level Concentrations) of various pollutants that will occur due to emissions from the stack after the proposed project is commissioned as derived from the AERMOD dispersion model.

Table 4-10: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – PM10

Station Code

Location PM10 Concentration (µg/m3) Existing Concentration

(98thpercentile) in Ambient Air [A]

1st highest, 24 hr GLC from AERMOD#

[B]

Probable Concentartion After Proposed Project

[A+B] 1. Vanch 77 0.04 77.04 2. Ghodasar 78 0.42 78.42 3. Ramol 85 0.02 85.02 4. Geratnagar 87 0.06 87.06 5. Laxmipura 85 0.09 85.09 6. Geratpur 72 0.3 72.30 7. AnarChmicals 83 0.97 83.97 8. Project Site 82 -- --

Permissible Limit [NAAQ-2009]* 100

Note: * Permissible limits as per the National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards

# These are max. 24 hr. GLCs values evaluated by AERMOD are based on the following: 1) Assumption that the SPM from the stack consist of only 10 𝜇𝜇m size particles 2) All the above 10 𝜇𝜇m size particles will fall on to the ground and get added to the existing ground level

concentration of PM10 𝜇𝜇m size particles 3) The Total PM emission from the flue gas stack being maximum of 87.06 µg/Nm3

Table 4-11: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – PM

.

2.5

Station Code

Location PM2.5 Concentration (µg/m3) Existing Concentration



[B]


[A+B] 1. Vanch 40 0.04 40.04 2. Ghodasar 44 0.42 44.42 3. Ramol 52 0.02 52.02 4. Geratnagar 42 0.06 42.06 5. Laxmipura 38 0.09 38.09 6. Geratpur 39 0.3 39.3 7. AnarChmicals 44 0.97 44.97 8. Project Site 43 -- --


Note: * Permissible limits as per the National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards

# These are max.24 hr. GLCs values evaluated by AERMOD are based on the following:

1) Assumption that the SPM from the stack consist of only 2.5 𝜇𝜇m size particles 2) All the above 2.5 𝜇𝜇m size particles will fall on to the ground and get added to the existing

ground level concentration of PM2.5

𝜇𝜇m size particles

3) The Total PM emission from the flue gas stack being maximum of 52.02 µg/Nm3.




Figure 4-2: Air quality contour for pollutant – PM




Figure 4-3: Air quality contour for pollutant – PM [on Google image]

Table 4-12: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant – NOx

Station Code

Location NOx Concentration (µg/m3) Existing Concentration



[B]


[A+B] 1. Vanch 27 0.02 27.02

2. Ghodasar 29 0.16 29.16

3. Ramol 26 0.01 26.01

4. Geratnagar 26 0.03 26.03

5. Laxmipura 30 0.04 30.04

6. Geratpur 25 0.10 25.10

7. AnarChmicals 44 0.38 44.38

8. Project Site 42 -- --


Note * Permissible limits as per the National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards # These are max. 24 hr. GLCs values evaluated by AERMOD are based on the NOx

emission concentration in flue gas stack (Please see Table-4.9)

The Total NOx emission from the stack being maximum of 44.38 µg/Nm

3




Figure 4-4: Air quality contour for pollutant – NO

x




Figure 4-5: Air quality contour for pollutant – NOx

[on Google image]

Table 4-13: Details of cumulative GLCs for pollutant –SO2

Station Code

Location SO2 Concentration (µg/m3) Existing Concentration



[B]


[A+B] 1. Vanch 36 0.04 36.04

2. Ghodasar 31 0.38 31.38

3. Ramol 29 0.02 29.02

4. Geratnagar 23 0.07 23.07

5. Laxmipura 27 0.09 27.09

6. Geratpur 33 0.27 33.27

7. AnarChemicals 46 0.95 46.95

8. Project Site 45 -- --


Note: * Permissible limits as per the National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards # This max. 24 hr. GLCs values evaluated by AERMOD are based on the SO2 emission

concentration from flue gas stack (Please see Table-4.9) The Total SO2 emission from the stack being maximum of 30.47 µg/Nm

3

However , it may be noted that actual emissions will be lower than above stated values




Figure 4-6: Air quality contour for pollutant – SO

2




Figure 4-7: Air quality contour for pollutant – SO2


The impacts due to construction activities will be limited to the period of construction i.e. short term impacts only. The air quality will be marginally affected by the activities like excavation, civil construction, transportation and handling of construction materials and installation of equipments. The main problem anticipated will increase in SPM level due to dust contamination.It may be noted that the causes of Suspended Particulate Matter in ambient air may be due to:

[on Google image]

1. Loose topsoil.

2. Local meteorological conditions at the site.

Because of vehicular traffic there may be marginal increase in concentration of PM10 and PM2.5. Regular sprinkling of water is proposed during construction activities for the suppression of dust. The approach roads and vehicles will be kept in good condition to minimize automobile exhaust.

The impact will be confined within the project premises and is expected to be negligible outside the plant premises. Proper upkeep and maintenance of vehicles, sprinkling of water during this phase, providing sufficient vegetation etc. are some of the measures that would greatly reduce the impacts during the construction phase.


The major source of air pollutants will be flue gas emissions from a coal based boiler, process emissions. Details of stack/vents and air pollution control measures are given in Chapter-2.The concentrations of pollutants at the ground levels have been computed using computer simulation model to assess the impact of emissions for the proposed project.

Baseline AAQ data indicates that average concentration of ambient air quality parameter such as PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, and NH3etc.in the surrounding area is within the permissible limits as per National Ambient Air Quality Standards. Please refer Chapter-3.

The unit will transport and store raw materials, products and hazardous chemicals in closed containers to reduce the fugitive emissions online sensors will be installed before commencement of the production as mentioned in Chapte-2as well as adequate air pollution control measures will be provided. GLC value of ambient air quality parameter PM10 around the proposed project site will slightly increase at few places after the proposed project, Which may be due to the construction activities such as site development, excavation, movement of vehicle/equipments are ongoing in the impact areas anduse of raw materials for construction such as sand, gravels, cement etc. in these areas. Thus, there would be marginal adverse impact on the air environment due to the proposed project.




4.9 Noise Environment


During construction, construction equipment, including dozer, scrapers, concrete mixers, generators, turbines, vibrators and power tools, cooling towers, compressors and vehicles will be the major noise sources. Construction noise is difficult to predict because the level of activity will constantly change. Most of construction activities are expected to produce noise level within the prescribed limit. The noise generated from various sources will be of short duration. Therefore, no significant impact is envisaged in the construction phase.


The major source of noise during operation phase will be operation of pumps, compressors and cooling tower etc. Similar to the existing unit, all the equipment in the proposed unit will be designed and operated to have the noise level not exceeding 75-85 dB (A) at a distance of 1.5 m from the equipment.

Monitored noise level are given in Chapter-3, indicates that ambient noise levels in the study area are well within the permissible limit of the National Ambient Noise Quality Standards. The occasional noise will be attenuated by the development of green belt in and around the industry, which will be taken up-right from the construction phase. Also ear-protecting devices will be provided for personnel working in high noise generating area.

4.10 WaterEnvironment


During construction phase, quantity of waste water generated will be very less and the same will bedisposed off through septic tank/soak pit system.


The water consumption after the proposed expansion will be 505 kl/day on first day and from second day onwards 339 kl/day only. Water balance diagram is depicted in Chapter-2.

After the proposed expansion the domestic wastewater approx. 14 kl/day will be treated in STP and the treated water will be used for flushing and gardening purposes.

The industrial process wastewater will be segregated into two OBA-DT stream and remaining process stream.

Wastewater generated from OBA – DT production along with RO reject and Nutch Filter reject will be treated in Multiple Effect Evaporator (MEE). Concentrated slurry from MEE will be filtered in filter nutch and filtrate will be taken back to MEE. Condensate will be recycled in process and boiler operation.

Process stream other than OBA-DT will be passed through chlorination stage (to reduce COD load) followed by ETP before its discharge to CETP vatva for further treatment.

Cooling purge, boiler blow-down and washing stream will be treated in RO plant. RO reject will be treated in MEE while permeate from said RO will be recycled in washing, boiler, cooling and domestic activity. Sludge generated from ETP along with MEE salt will be sent to TSDF site.

Baseline data collected for water quality (surface/ ground water) are tabulated against CPCB tolerance limits for class-B (outdoor bathing), based on the information provided by the villagers. Results of GIDC water are tabulated against drinking water standard,Please refer, Chapter-3.


As per the study done by Ecology and Biodiversity expert there is no Wild Life Sanctuary/ National Parks within the 10 km radius of the site. Greenbelt will be developed and maintained as per plan specified in Chapter- 2.




There will not be adverse impact due to proposed expansion on the flora and fauna after taking the mitigation / control measures. 4.12 Socio-Economic

Table 4-14: Impact identification and suggested mitigation measures

Impact Identification Mitigation Measures

1 Location As construction done in AMC granted built up area, No adverse effect done in surrounding environment.

NA

2 Noise pollution

There is no impact on agricultural activities in the core zone of 10 km and as this project is situated in notified area. The buffer zone will remain undisturbed and thus no adverse impact will be envisaged

Necessary mitigation shall be done to control noise level during daily activity.

3 Transportation & Vehicle movement

As project site is located close to Highway major vehicle movement is observed.

It is suggested to have two lane road for safe passage of vehicle with proper sign board during regular phase of project.

4 Wastage storage

There is ample area and facility within the premises for storage of finished goods, raw materials, hazardous waste etc. and therefore no expansion whatsoever will be required as far as the local infrastructure is concern

-It may have suggested having proper storage of finished goods and raw materials as per the standard set by quality control agencies. -Transportation and hazardous waste done will be done as per GPCB guide line.

5 Health & Safety

-Some health and safety hazards are anticipated to affect the persons employed in the project. Adequate measures should be taken to avoid any occupational health hazards.

-Safe work procedures, risk/ hazard control/ prevention measures and provision of PPEs to minimize the impacts due to improper storage and handling facilities of raw-materials and products. -To refresh the academic and skill improvement as per management requirement, induction training and external training has been/ will be provided to fresher with respect to “Industrial Safety & Health Training

6 Employment Project site will produce good opportunity for the employment.

Suggestion to Adopt of policy of local employment & priority to local contractor, a significant long term positive impact during regular operation is foreseen on the economic environment.




4.13 Risk & Hazards

Table 4-15: Impact and mitigation measures with respect to Risk & Hazards

Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures To Be Taken Construction Phase Constrution

activities/plant commissiong

Health & safety issue during material handling, construction activities and mechanical equipment erection, etc

• Tarpaulin sheet covers should be used on the material during transportation.

• Fume generation due to welding and allied activities should be negligible and restricted to project site.

• All workers should be trained to use welding shields and follow safer practice.

• PPE, viz. saftey belt/net, safety helmet, safety boots, nose masks etc, should be provided to all workers.

• All vehicles should be properly serviced and should be required to carry valid PUC certificate.

Operation Phase Project activities

during operation phase viz. fuel storgae/transportationfuel combustion, power generation etc

Maximum credible scenario/ footprint due to proposed project actiovities are identified; details are attached as risk analysis study.

• From the Risk Analysis studies conducted, it would be observed that by and large, the risks are confined within the factory boundary walls in case of fire, explosion and spillage of chemicals.

• On site emergency plan & preparedness plan to be prepared and implemented to combat such situations.

• To minimize the consequential effects of the risk scenarios, following steps are recommended.

• Plant should meet provisions of the Manufacture, storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1986 & the factories Act, 1948.

• Process hazard analysis and HAZOP study to be conducted for each process and recommendation to be implemented.

• Safety measures shall be implemented as per provided in report.

• Explosive licence and other statutory norms shall be incorporated in plant construction.

• Process parameter and safety shall be considered as a built in safe system.

• All new employees shall be trained for safe operation, handling and storage of hazardous process and material.

• Emergency plan shall be prepared as




Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures To Be Taken per QRA hazardous scenarios and periodic On Site Emergency, Mock Drills should be conducted, in order to train the staff and make them mentally prepare to tackle emergency.

• Emergency handling facilities should be maintained in a tip top condition round the clock.

• The details of emergency equipments are given in on site emergency Plan along with its quantity shall be procure and maintained.

• For proposed plant Fire & Safety organization setup to be plan for better plant safety.

• Safety devices and control instruments should be calibrated once in a year.

• HSE management system shall be prepared and implemented at early stage of the plant commissioning.

• Permit to work system shall be implemented on 100 % basis for hazardous work to be carried out in the plant.

• Induction safety course should be prepared and training of all new employees before starting duties in plant should be made compulsory.

• Fire hydrant system and sprinkler system is provided and it should be expanded in proposed plant also. Hydrant system shall be maintained in auto mode at all time.

• Manual call point and smoke detectors to be installed at design level.

• Safety organizational setup to be plan at construction level and HSE department staff to be employed for system setup for proposed facilities..

• Double Static earthing and electrical earthing needs to be provided to all equipments of the plant and earth pit testing to be carried out once in a six months.

• Safe operating procedure to be prepared for hazardous process and material handling process.

• TREM CARD, SCBA set condition, Antidote Kit, required PPEs as per SOP laid down should be provided.

• Further all the vessels examined periodically by a recognized




Activity Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures To Be Taken competent person under the Gujarat Factory Rules 1963-Rule 61(1).

• Proper coloring as per IS 2379 should be done in plant of pipeline network, tank and equipment’s, to protect it from corrosion.

• Premedical examination, periodical medical examination shall be carried out and record needs to be maintained in form No-32 & 33.

• Work place monitoring and health and hygiene surveillance to be carried out and recorded in Form No-37.

• More detailsare given in details Risk Assessment report attached nasAnnexure 7.1.


Analysis of Alternatives


Chapter 5. Analysis of Alternatives

5.1 Site Alternative

The proposed expansion will be carried out within existing industrial premises that have suitable infrastructure facilities viz. water, power, storage, medical, communication, roads, rails etc in / around the premises. Based on the above stated scenario the existing premises were selected for the proposed project activity.

5.2 Alternative for Technologies

In our pursuit of excellence, we always strive for best available technologies (BAT) processes that are safe, give quality products, give maximum yields, generate less of effluents/ byproducts and are economical. For existing manufacturing unit best available technologies (BAT) are in place and the additional infrastructure facilities, plant and machineries, which are required for the proposed expansion, best available technologies would be preferred and used.

Table 5-1: Analysis of alternative technologies with respect to environment/waste management

Particulars Proposed Technology Remarks Water Supply • Total fresh water consumption from

2nd day onwards will be only 339 kld. • In current scenario, water is being

supplied by GIDC and the same will be continued after proposed expansion.

• Unit has already proposed water reuse/recycled option.

Wastewater Disposal

• Domestic effluent will be treated in STP while industrial wastewater will be treated in ETP.

• Treated water will be reused for washing, flushing, process, boiler and cooling operation while, remnant will be sent to CETP, vatva.

• Existing wastewater treatment plant is efficient and efficacious to treat existing wastewater and treated wastewater conform statutory desired norms before discharge to CETP, vatva.

• MEE & RO plant will be installed to meet recycling requirements and new STP will be provided for treatment of domestic wastewater.

Fuel Requirement / and Air Emissions Control

• Natural Gas is being used as fuel for existing boiler.

• Imported Coal/ Agro waste will be used as fuel for proposed boiler and hot air generators.

• Natural Gas is a comparatively clean fuel.

• Adequate APCM will be provided for use of solid fuel.

Hazardous Waste Disposal

• The hazardous wastes will be generated from the units are mainly; ETP sludge, MEE salts, used oil, discarded drum /containers/ bags /liners, and spent ion exchange resin.

• These wastes will be properly collected, stored in a separated/designated storage area and safely disposed to approve TSDF/ authorized recycler/ registered recyclers/refiners.

• All type of wastes to be properly segregated, collected, stored in a separate/ designated storage area and safely transported to GPCB authorized agencies(s) for its final disposal.


Analysis of Alternatives


Particulars Proposed Technology Remarks • Unit will obtain membership of TSDF

site to accommodate additional hazardous waste prior to Consent to Operate.

It would not be out of place to mention that M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP is an ISO 14001:2004, OHSAS 18001:2007, certified company. Company has laid down policy towards best quality, environment, health and safety management. In addition, company is committed to meet the environmental statutory norms by using best available technologies.


Environmental Monitoring Program


Chapter 6. Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Objectives of Environment Monitoring The main objectives of environmental monitoring are -

To assess the changes in environmental conditions, To monitor the effective implementation of mitigation/control measures, To adopt further preventive/corrective action with respect to mitigation/control measure, if significant

deteriorations in environmental quality occurs.

6.2 Details of Environment Monitoring

Regular Monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise, soil and meteorological data and safety measures in the plant are vital for proper environmental management of any industry. Monitoring/sampling and analysis/ measurement of various environmental parameters will be carried out as per national/ international standard methods (IS/APHA/validated method). Environmental Monitoring Program to be adopted by M/s. MeghmaniDyes and Intermediates LLPis as given in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1: Environmental monitoring programme

Sr. No.

Particulars Location Monitoring Parameters

Monitoring Frequency

Monitoring and Record Keeping

During Construction Phase 1. Ambient air

quality outside premises

Near Construction area and nearby villages where monitoring has been done

PM10, PM2.5, CO, SO2, NOx, and VOC

Weekly For 24 hrs

GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring and data analysis in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

2. Noise Near Construction area and nearby villages where monitoring has been done

Leq (dBA) Weekly For 24 hrs


3. Soil Quality Construction area and nearby villages where monitoring has been done

Characteristic and composition

Monthly GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring and data analysis in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

4. Surface and groundwater quality

Nearby villages where monitoring has been done

Temperature, pH, SS, Oil & Grease, BOD, COD, TDS, SS,


During Operational Phase 1. Ambient air

quality Material handling, storgae and vehicle parking area, one location within plant premises area nearby villages where monitoring has been done

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx

Monthly For 24 hrs


2. Stack Monitoring

Proposed plant PM, SO2, NOx Daily / Monthly

Industry will carry out online monitoring/ GPCB approved




Sr. No.

Particulars Location Monitoring Parameters

Monitoring Frequency

Monitoring and Record Keeping

agency will carry out monitoring and data analysis in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

3. Work place air quality

Within premises PM10, PM2.5, NOx, SO2,

Monthly Industry will carry out online monitoring/ GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring and data analysis in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

4. Meteorology -- Wind velocity, Wind direction, Relative humidity, Temperature

As required by statutory authority

To be monitored as required by statutory authority.

5. Wastewater quality

Treated wastewater from outlet of ETP

Temperature, pH, SS, Oil & Grease, BOD, COD, TDS, SS,

Daily / Monthly

Industry will carry out monitoring and analysis / GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring and data analysis in accordance with Environmental Clearance. Inhouse Laboratory has been already developed for analysis of certain parameters

6. Surface and groundwater quality

Within 10 km radius from the project site

pH, TSS, TDS, Alkalinity, Hardness, TC, FC, Temperature, COD, BOD, Cl-, Heavy Metals

As required by statutory authority


7. Hazardous waste

ETP sludge pH, Moisture content, Organic matter, Total inorganic matter Ca, Mg, SO4

-2, Cl-


8. Ambient noise environment

Within 10 km radius from the project site

-- Quarterly GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

9. Work zone noise environment

Within premises -- Monthly GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

10. Soil quality Two locations within plant premises and nearby locations

Composition and characterstics

Yearly and under accidental scenarios

GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring in accordance with Environmental Clearance.

Budget for Implementation of Environmental Monitoring Plan: GPCB approved agency will carry out monitoring/sampling, analysis and charge/cost will be as specified by the GPCB. Annual budget allocated towards monitoring/pollution control arrangement with respect to the proposed project are given in Chapter- 10, section- 10.3.




6.3 Statutory Environmental Requirements and Reporting Schedules

M/s. MeghmaniDyes and Intermediates LLPis committed to comply and submit the compliance report with respect to stipulated conditions under the Environment (Protection) Act/Rules and other applicable Acts/ Rules / Notifications (as amended from time to time and/or as required) to the competent authority.


Additional Studies


Chapter 7. Additional Studies

7.1 Risk Assessment

The purpose of risk assessment study includes; identification and assessment of potential hazards & risks arising from the proposed activities connected to the manufacturing marketing terminal that requires management to comply with regulatory requirements; and to reduce or eliminate to As Low As Reasonably Practical (ALARP) in terms of risk to environment, human health, risk of injury/damage to plant, equipment and business interruption etc. The scope of the quantitative risk assessment (QRA) is Identification of Hazards and Major Loss of Containment (LOC) events which consist with calculation of physical effects of accidental scenarios, which includes frequency analysis for incident scenarios leading to hazards to people and facilities (flammable gas, fire, and smoke, explosion overpressure and toxic gas hazards) and consequence analysis for the identified hazards covering impact on people and potential escalation; damage limits identification and quantification of the risks and contour mapping on the layouts; individual risk quantification and contour mapping; societal risk quantification and contour mapping; hazard mitigation recommendations based on QRA. Detail risk assessment study is attached as Annexure‐ 7.1. Health check‐up report of few employee of MDIL existing unit is attached as Annexure‐ 7.2.

7.2 Social Impact / R&R Action Plan

The socio‐economic study of the study area was carried out and related details are presented in Chapter‐3,section‐ 3.15. The proposed project to be set‐up within existing premises and there is no displacement of villagers/peoples. Therefore, the R&R (Rehabilitation & Resettlement) policy/plan is not undertaken. However, the direct financial and social benefits with special emphasis on the benefit to the local people including tribal population will be preferred and the proposed budgets for corporate environment responsibility (CER) activities are summarized in Chapter‐ 2, section‐ 2.20.

7.3 Public Consultation

It may be noted that the proposed products to manufacture by M/s. Meghmani Dyes and IntermediatesLLP fall under the Project/Activity No. 5(f)of Category ‘B’ as stated in the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14/09/2006 and therefore Environmental Clearance for these products is required to be obtained.

It was due to this fact that an application/proposal was submitted vide their online (on MoEFCC website/ portal) Proposal No.: IA/GJ/IND2/134100/2019 to obtain related TOR/ Environmental Clearance. The application was online accepted by MOEF &CC and has issued acceptance letter for TOR application. The proposal was considered by EAC (Expert Appraisal Committee) and has prescribed/issued the TOR on MoEF & CC’s website,Copy of TORs is attached Annexure‐1.1.

In this connection we take this opportunity to state the following:

Our proposed expansion project to be set‐up at existing premises of M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP, is located within notified GIDC Vatva, District‐Ahmedabad, Gujarat.

Since, our unit is located within GIDC Vatva, Gujarat Public Consultation is not applicable as a requirement towards obtaining Environmental Clearance.


Project Benefits


Chapter 8. Project Benefits

8.1 General

M/s. MeghmaniDyes and Intermediates LLPpropose expansion in production capacity within its existing premises.Proposed project is needed to serve increasing demand of proposed products from domestic and export market.It has many local,state level and national level benefitsas well as also assist in improvement of the social-economic status, infrastructure facility etc. in surrounding, local area.

8.2 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure

The project will improve the physical infrastructure of the adjoining areas including the following:

Infrastructure development through providing drinking water facilities in the village of the region.

Support the health care units/hospitals in the region by providing infrastructural facilities. Preventive healthcare by organizing health camps for immunization through vaccination. Curative healthcare by conducting specific health camps such as eye care for Cataract, Glaucoma etc.

Awareness program and community activities viz. family welfare programs, vocational & skill development training for youth, drinking water facility, plantation in nearby area etc.

Improved road communication; strengthening of existing community facilities through the existing community developmentprogramme.

8.3 Improvements in the Social Infrastructure

The main focus area of the activities is given below:

Residential bridge course for drop out students through free coaching classes for students belonging toeconomically weak background.

Conducting awareness camps for reproductive and child health

Initiatives on supporting the Ayurveda, Yoga and Homeopathy

Improve the level of literacy at primary, secondary and advanced levels of education by providing scholarships to the meritorious students, enhancing school infrastructural facilities, industrial training etc.

Sustainable livelihood and farming systems by providing awareness on various agricultural practices for better yield, pesticide and fertilizer management, etc.

Training and awareness to the self help groups for income generation

Social welfare and woman Empowerment.

There should be positive impact on the socio-economic condition of the area in terms of direct and indirect employment due to the proposed project.

8.4 Employment Potential–Skilled; Semi-Skilled and Unskilled

There will be employment opportunity for local people during construction and operation phase.

After proposed expansion the total employment generation would be including male, female, skilled / unskilled labors and office staff of different expertise. Also, indirect employment will be anticipated by way of providing services such as civil, mechanical, electrical works. Auxiliary services such as construction materials transportation, migrant labours movement, taxi services, eateries, heavy vehicle driving set of skills, service station/garages for construction equipments and heavy vehicles will induce


Project Benefits


the demand and promote the local economy. Transportation, accommodation, food consumption by the migrant people will induce a demand in the local market thereby itboost the local business community.

This will be an opportunity for the local people to source for alternate livelihood by way of trading, selling or force to acquire new set of skills due to the change in demand pattern.

8.5 Other Tangible Benefits

In consideration of financial and social benefits with special emphasis on the benefit to the local people, budgetary fund allocated for various corporate environment responsibilities (CER) activities such as Capacity building of youth through technical training classes, Helping students for the transportation to schools and also provide facility of career counseling to the students, Establishment of SHG group in villages,To organize medical camp for the villages people at some regular time extension, Strengthening Public amenities drinking water, Sanitation, tree plantation, and Building facility for the rain water harvesting to uplift ground water level with the contribution of villages in nearby villages/area. Budgetary plan details are given under Chapter- 2, section- 2.20.


Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis


Chapter 9. Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

9.1 Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

As per EIA Notification 14‐09‐2006, this Chapter of the ‘Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis’ is applicable only if it is recommended at the Scoping stage. However, as per the TOR points issued by MOEF & CC, vide their letter Ref. No.: No. IA‐J‐11011/454/2019‐IA‐II(I), 24th Feb 2020, (Annexure‐1.1) the Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis is not applicable.


Environmental Management Plan


Chapter 10. Environmental Management Plan

10.1 Objectives of Environmental Management Plan

The main objectives in formulating this environmental management plan are:

To treat all the pollutants viz. liquid, solid and gaseous those contribute to the degradation of the environment with appropriate technology.

To comply with all regulations stipulated by the Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change (MoEFCC) /Pollution Control Board (PCB) regarding air emissions and liquid effluent discharge under various Act/Rules/Laws for prevention and control of pollution.

To handle hazardous wastes as per the Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989 and subsequent amendments.

To encourage support and conduct developmental work for achieving environmental standards and to improve the methods of environmental management.

To create good working conditions (avoidance of air and noise pollution) for employees. To reduce fire and risk/ accident hazards. Perspective budgeting and allocation of funds for environmental management expenditure. Continuous

development and search for innovative technologies for a cleaner and better environment.

10.2 Environmental Management Cell

A separate Environmental Management Cell / Organogram as shown in Figure- 10.1 to be set-up to undertake the monitoring of the environmental pollution level by measuring stack emissions, ambient air quality, wastewater quality, noise level etc., and development of greenbelt as per Environmental Management Plan. Environmental Management Cell will meet at least once a month to assess the progress and analyze the data collected for the month as per the environmental monitoring programme (Chapter- 6), Safety and Environmental policy attached as Annexure-10.1. Any deviation/variation noticed shall be immediately taken into consideration for improvement of the same. Yearly action plan of EMP will be updated with respect to results achieved and proposed activities for next year.

M/s. Meghmani Dyes & IntermediatesLLP will carry out the monitoring to ensure that the pollution is limited to allowable values and to take preventive / corrective action either by providing new equipments or by improving the performance of the existing pollution control equipments. The Environmental Management Organogram will also co-ordinate with all the related activities such as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region and greenbelt development.




Figure 10-1: Environmental Management Organogram




10.3 Pollution Control Arrangement / Mitigative Measures Environmental Management Plan would specifically consist of the following and industry will follow the said plan physically as well as in spirit. Pollution control arrangements/mitigative measures for different types/sources of pollution are presented in the Table- 10.1 and Table- 10.2.

Table 10-1: Environmental management plan for different pollution sources (construction phase)

Description Type of Pollutant / Wastes

Source Pollution Control Arrangements / Mitigation Measures

Environmental parameters Air, Water, Noise, Land/soil, Flora &fauna, Socio-economic, Health & safety

Particulate matter, fugitive emissions, domestic waste water, noise , municipal solid / hazardous waste

Various construction activities like site cleaning, excavation, installation of equipments, transportation and material handling etc.

Loading and unloading of materials from tankers may lead to fugitive emissions. To avoid the same, the materials transfer will be done through fixed piping connections.

Tarpaulin sheet covers will be used on the materials during transportation. To reduce the noise generation during the transportation activities; the vehicle will be kept

periodically serviced and maintained as per the requirement of latest trend in automobile industry.

The vehicles having PUCs and spark arrestors will only allowed for the transportation. All the vibrating parts will be checked periodically and serviced to reduce the noise generation.

Sound producing equipments will be enclosed in the sound proofing enclosure to give residual sound pressure level of 75 dB(A).

Sources of high noise level will be provided adequate sound enclosures. Domestic wastewater will be treated and disposed off through a treatment plant All municipal solid waste will be properly stored on site before it is collected by

municipality/other agency for its ultimate disposal. All workers will be trained to use wielding shields and follow safer practice. To minimize the adverse health effects all necessary/ suitable personnel protective equipments

like helmet, safety goggles, gum boots, earmuff/ear plug and safety net etc will be provided for working personnel.

Excavated earth will be used for re-filling of foundation & plinth, green belt and leveling low lying areas at project site itself.

Construction and demolition materials (if any) will be used for leveling low lying areas. Top soil will be stored onsite and used for development of greenbelt/ landscaping. Regular water sprinkling will be done. Greenbelt will be developed and maintained (as per EB expert and CPCB guidelines) within the

premises / around the premises.




Table 10-2: Environmental management plan for different pollution sources (operation phase)



Air Environment PM, SO₂, NOx Natural Gas based Boiler

Natural gas will be used as fuel which is a comparatively clean fuel. Process gas emission from spray dryers and spin flash dryers.

CO2 Fugitive emissions from Sources such as open surfaces , ETP , surface impoundments, retention ponds

and other gases

Leak proof technology for valve and pumps. Plugs, caps and blinds for open ended lines. Rupture discs and soft seals for pressure valves. Dual mechanical seals with Non-VOC barrier fluid/ degassing vent system. Closed loop sampling system Enclosure of seal area double condenser system will be provided. The vents of the secondary condenser connected with the scrubber. Covering of all open surfaces wherever possible. Sensors will be provided in work place area

Water Environment

Low pollution potential

Domestic wastewater

Domestic effluent will will be treated in seawge treatment plant (STP) to achieve the stipulated norms/standards by statutory authority and the treated water will be utilized for flushing and gardening.

The existing treated water from ETP will be discharged to CETP and the proposed waste waterwill be treated in MEE & RO and reused in process, cooling & wahing.

Slightly higher pollution potential

Industrial wastewater

Solid / Hazardous Waste

ETP Sludge ETP Will be collected, stored and disposed at authorized TSDF site.

MEE Salt MEE Will be collected, stored, transported and disposed at GPCB approved TSDF site.

Used Oil Manufacturing process

Will be collected, stored and sold to authorized recycler.

Discarded Drums / Containers/ Liners / Bags

Raw material/other material supplier

Will be collected, stored and reused /sold to authorized recycler

Spent Ion Exchange Resin

RO Will be collected, stored, transported and disposed at GPCB approved TSDF site.

Noise Environment

Structure-borne noise: The vibration

Vehicle, Transportation, Water Cooling

To reduce the noise generation during the transportation activities; the vehicle will be kept periodically serviced and maintained as per the requirement of latest trend in automobile industry.






transmitted may activate the building structure where it mounted without proper installation. Air-borne noise due to air turbulence at equipment/ structure and etc.

Towers, Air-cooled chillers, Fans, Ducts, Other plant equipment & machinery

Acoustic mat on the water surface will be provided to reduce the water splashing noise. All the vibrating parts will be checked periodically and serviced to reduce the noise generation. Complete enclosure with silencers at condenser fan outlets and at air inlets of the enclosure will

be fabricated. Greenbelt will be developed around the plant peripheral which act as a curtain/barrier between

the plant and nearby buildings. The vehicles having PUCs and spark arrestors will only allowed for the transportation. Vibration isolators to support a water cooling tower, thereby isolating it from the building

structure will be provided. Equipments will be properly mounted on structure to provide support/add rigidity.

Biological Environment (Green belt Development )

Particulate emission

Manufacturing process and other ancillary activities

Greenbelt will be developed and maintained (as per EB expert and CPCB guidelines) within the premises/ around the premises to control the expected pollutants due to proposed project activity as well as to improve the aesthetic.

Characteristic of plants mainly considered for affecting absorption of pollutant gases and removal of dust particle are as follows. For absorption of Gases: - Tolerance towards pollutants in question, at concentration, that are not too high to be

instantaneously lethal - Longer duration of foliage - Freely exposed foliage - Adequate height of crown - Openness of foliage in canopy - Big leaves( long and broad laminar surface) - Large number of stomatal apertures For Removal of Suspended Particular matter - Height and spread of crown. - Leaves supported on firm petiole - Abundance of surface on bark and foliage - Roughness of bark






- Abundance of axillary hairs - Hairs or scales on laminar surface - Protected Stomata

Three fauna that falls under the Scheduled-I category was reported from the study area Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus), Mud or Flap Shell Turtle, Woolly Necked Stork. The rest of the fauna reported from the study area, falls under either in schedule-II, Schedule-III or Schedule-IV of the wild Life Protection Act 1972. Most of these species are not conservation dependent in Gujarat, and they are proliferating itself in its own habitats. Few of them like Nilgai and have become threat to the farmers as they are invading their cops very frequently in this region. Hence conservation measures are not provided for these animals.

Conservation measures will be adopted with respect to same; details are given in Chapter – 3, Section-3.14.7.9.1,3.14.7.9.2 & 3.14.7.9.3

Land Environment Gaseous/ Particulate emission

Manufacturing process, Transportation

Treated domestic waste water will be reused for flushing and gardening where as the existing treated water from ETP will be discharged to CETP and the proposed waste waterwill be treated in MEE & RO and reused in process, cooling & wahing.

Pollution control devices/measures will be installed/implemented properly to treat air & liquid effluent, it will be periodical checked/maintained. Solid/hazardous waste will be collected, stored in a designated storage area with proper flooring & roofing before it’s final disposal.

Tarpaulin sheet covers will be used on the materials during transportation. Soil samples will be collected at regular interval for mitigation. Proper paving will be done to avoid land contamination due to leakage/spillage of fuel or

material.

Risk & Safety Management

Fire hazards Storage & handling of materials, manufacturing process

Risk Assessment study for proposed project has been carried out. Details of Risk assessment study report along with mitigation measure/emergency plan to control / minimize the probable hazard due to proposed project are given in Chapter- 7, Section-7.1, and Annexure- 7.1.

Fire fighting equipments/system and extinguishers will be installed as per the requirement of the fire risk in all plants/sections/departments and/or as per the requirement of Factory Act/ Rules/ IS 2190:1992/suggestion made in Risk Assessment Study.

Occupational/ workers health & safety

Occupational health & safety hazards

Storage & handling of materials, manufacturing

To minimize the adverse health effects all necessary/ suitable personnel protective equipments like helmet, safety goggles, gum boots, earmuff/ear plug and safety net etc will be provided for working personnel.






process All suggested/proposed pollution control devices/measure should be installed and operated / maintained properly on regular basis.

All precautionary methods will be adopted by the company as well unit is also committed towards the Health & Safety of workers and will provide a facility of pre-medical check-up of employees for detecting any kind of adverse effect on the health of employee due to the chemical or work place condition and providing opportunity to improve the working condition.

The workers exposed to higher noise level will be provided with ear muffs/ear plugs. The workers exposed to higher noise level will be provided with earmuffs/ earplugs. Proper handling of the materials and the maintenance of Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) will be followed to ensure safety within the plant area.

The project proponent will provide drinking water supply for the employees and the standard of the drinking water will be as per guidelines. Proper sanitary facilities will be made available by the project proponent so that employees do not suffer from any health ailments. The employees will be made aware of general practices sanitary practices.

Periodical training programme to inform the employees about their task, associated risk, and safe –working practices will be undertaken. Training will also include information on accident prevention, proper control and maintenance of equipment and safe material handling practices. To refresh the academic and skill improvement as per management requirement, induction training and external training will be provided to fresher’s with respect to “Industrial Safety & Health Training”.

Onsite-offsite emergency plan/disaster management plan will be developed as per the suggestion made in Risk Assessment Study. A regular monitoring of the occupational Health and Safety will reduce the chances of accidents hence all the records of job related accidents and illness will be maintained as per the requirement of Gujarat Factory Act. This information will be reviewed and evaluated to improve the effectiveness of Environmental Health and Safety programme.

Regular work place monitoring will be carried out Form-37 will be maintained as per GFR

Cleaner Production , Resource / Energy Conservation

Solid/liquid/gases pollutants

Manufacturing process & material handling/ storage

The cleaner production is a way or a tool to have sustainable development with initiative to have growth minimum disturbance to environment and human being. The approach to cleaner production is different from conventional method of end of pipe treatment. Cleaner production approach is directly reduction at source. Details of the same are given in Chapter- 2, Section- 2.22. Energy conservation will be adopted; details are given in Chapter- 2, Section- 2.23.






Socio-Economic Environment and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)

-- -- Regular environment awareness programme should organize to improve upon the surrounding population about the beneficial impacts of the projects and about the measures being undertaken for improving quality of life.

To minimize strain on existing infrastructure adequate provision of basic amenities education, health, transport etc is made considering the needs of workplace and migrating population.

Promoting tree plantation in the area should develop social forestry. Sanitation facilities must gradually be improved for better hygiene and Health Employment strategy would prefer employment of local people, promote Skill development. To mitigate the adverse impact likely to arise in social, cultural and economical aspects in the

surrounding region and the proposed project is expected to contribute towards enlistment of local people quality of life CSR activity will be organized. CSR activities are proposed by the industry and budgetary details are given in Chapter- 2, Section-2.20.



10.4 Budgetary Allocation for Pollution Control Arrangements

The budgetary allocation towards pollution control arrangements for the proposed project is presented in the Table- 10.3.

Table 10-3: Budgetary allocation towards pollution control arrangements

Sr. No.

Area of Expenditure

Capital Cost (Rs.)

Recurring Cost /Annum

(Rs.)

Remarks

1. Air Pollution Control

7150000 405000 Capital cost would include air pollution control devices and the recurring cost would include operation and maintenance of pollution control devices and stack monitoring.

2. Water Pollution Control

11050000

21000000

Capital cost would include cost of STP, RO,MEE and recurring cost would include maintenance charges, manpower salary etc.

3. Noise Pollution Control

40000

85000

Capital cost would include providing adequate sound enclosures and recurring cost would include monitoring of noise level.

4. Solid Waste Pollution Control

85000

6500000

Capital cost would include expense for providing storage area for hazardous waste and recurring cost would be for solid/ hazardous waste packing and for the membership of TSDF site and CHWIF.

5. Green Belt 50000

615000

Capital cost would include development of green belt and recurring cost would include maintenance charges.

7. Occupational Health & Safety

125000

250000

Capital cost would include expense for providing stock/storage of personnel protective equipments and safety systems etc. and recurring cost would include maintenance charges.

Total 18500000

32500000

--

It is expected that unit shall expend a capital cost about Rs. 1.85 Crores and annual recurring cost about Rs. 3.25 Crores towards environment management which is based on current financial assets of environmental management systems/techniques.


Summary andConclusion


Chapter 11. Summary andConclusion

11.1 Land / Soil Environment

The soil pollution is generally due to wastewater and solid waste. Industrial effluent will be treated in Effluent Treatment Plant and MEE & RO. The treated effluent will be reused for washing, boiler & cooling purposes.

To avoid discharge of air pollutants which may cause health /environmental impact on surrounding area, required preventive pollution control measures will be provided. All hazardous waste/solid waste/batteries and e-waste will be handled and disposed off properly, as per the applicable Act /Rules prescribed by MoEF&CC, CPCB related statutory authority.

Therefore, there would be no adverse impact on the land /soil environment due to this proposed project.

11.2 Meteorology and Air Environment

The general meteorological data collected during the study period confirms that climatic status of the study area is consistent with the regional meteorology. Baseline AAQ data indicates that average concentration of ambient air quality parameter such as PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

11.3 Noise Environment

and VOCs in the surrounding area is within the permissible limits as per National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQ).

The ground level concentration evaluated by Dispersion Modeling, It is found that incremental values due to the operation of proposed project will be very less and well within the permissible limit as prescribed in the NAAQ standards. The unit will transport and store raw materials, products and hazardous chemicals in closed containers to reduce the fugitive emissions as well. Regular sprinkling of water will be carried out to minimize the dust emission.

Thus, there would be marginal adverse impact on the air environment due to the proposed project.

Noise level in the project premises will be controlled at the source itself by appropriate use of noise suppressing systems. Noise level in the surrounding study area is well within the permissible limits given by the National Ambient Noise Quality Standards.

Thus, Noise generated due to the project activity shall create minor impact in surrounding environments. This shall further be attenuated by a barrier of plantation at the periphery of the project site.

11.4 Water Environment

Baseline data reveals that overall GIDC water quality is satisfactory to serve for a domestic purpose as per drinking water quality standards IS 10500: 2012.

Total water consumption; on first day 505Kl/day andfrom second day onwards it will be339Kl/day. Wastewater generation and disposal;domestic wastewater (14Kl/day) will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant while, industrial process wastewater (123 Kl/day) will be treated in Effluent Treatment Plant, Industrial utility wastewater (133 kl/day) will be treated in RO system and 20 kl/day process wastewater with 29 kl/day RO reject will be treted in MEE system.

ETP treated water (123 Kl/day) will be sent to CETP, Vatvawhile, other treated wastewater from RO & MEE (48 Kl/day + 104 kl/day) will be reused in washing, cooling, boiler operations and in process.

Thus, it can be concluded that there would not be any significant adverse impact on the water environment due to the proposed project.

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text

PC-16

Typewritten Text


Summary andConclusion


11.5 Geohydrology

As stated above during construction as well as during operation phase, the water requirement will be met through GIDC. Proper monitoring and care shall be taken for effective management of treated effluents. Hazardous/solid waste will be managed as per CPCB guidelines. Storm water drainage facility will be properly managed to avoid any accumulation of rain water during the monsoon.

Thus, it can be concluded that there would not be any significant adverse impact on the ground water environment a due to the proposed project.

11.6 Geology and Soil

It may be noted that unit is dyes manufacturing unit. As per Earthquake zoning map of India, project area lies in the Moderate Risk Zone (Zone-III) of seismicity. Transportation of hazardous waste to be carried out as per CPCB guidelines. Plantation of trees will reduce the impact on soil; soil samples will be collected and tested at regular intervals from nearby areas.

Fly ash will be collected in closed silos therefore there will not be any adverse impact on soil due to proposed expansion. Regular water sprinkling will be carried out to avoid dust emission which may arise due to transportation of raw material/products/hazardous waste and coal handling. Proper care should be taken for storage of fuel and raw material to avoid any spillage. RCC flooring, paving, covered shed should be done to reduce contamination of soil. Green belt will be developed which help in soil erosion control.


The flora and fauna of the study area indicate that there are well diversified species in the study area, which proves that impact on flora and fauna is negligible. There would be no adverse impact of air pollution on the surrounding ecology as all the necessary air pollution control measures will be provided.

It may be noted the unit will develop a large green belt area, which will help in inviting birds and other creatures to proliferate. Thus, the proposed project would not have any adverse impact on the ecology.

11.8 Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed project will generate employment during operation phase. The indirect employment will also be generated by way of transportation, shopkeepers and other casual employment for many people. Local people will be given preference for the jobs in the proposed project.

Economic status of the local people will improve due to the increased business opportunities, thereby, making a positive impact. Educational, medical and housing facilities in the study area will considerably improve.

Thus, the proposed project will have significant positive impact on the employment pattern of the study area.

11.9 Summary of the EIA Study

Identification of Impacts has been carried by using Matrix method and Delphi technique. Quantification of impacts by Delphi techniques observed that the Pollution Potential of the proposed project is Moderate. Based on which mitigation measures suggested. The salient features of the impact on environment due to the proposed project can be summarized as follows:

Construction phase will not impart appreciable impact, as indicated mitigation measures will be followed.

Negligible impacts will occur on air quality during operation phase. However, all the necessary air pollution control measures will be provided.

Negligible impact of Geology and Soil environment.


Summary and Conclusion

No any adverse impact on Landuse /Geohydrology

No ecological damage will occur.

No adverse impacts will occur on water / Air environment.

Economic status of the local population will be improved due to the increased business opportunities. The industry will generate employment.

APPROX. RS. 32 LAKHS ((2 % IN WHICH 1% AS PER MOEFCC‐ OFFICE MEMORANDUM (OM) DATED 1ST MAY 2018 AND 1 % AS PER THE MINISTRY’S OFFICE MEMORANDUM 31ST OCTOBER, 2019 REGARDING PROJECTS LOCATED IN CRITICALLY POLLUTED AREA DOUBLE THE CER WILL BE ALLOCATED) TOWARDS CER ACTIVITY

Budget allocated for Pollution Control measures are made and details are given in Chapter 10.

Environmental management plan has been formulated to operate / regulate /control all the pollution control measures and environmental management cell has been set‐up to follow the formulated environmental plan.

Thus, the proposed project will have overall minor negative impacts on the environment and these impacts will be encountered with proper mitigative measures.


Disclosure of Consultant Engaged


Chapter 12. Disclosure of Consultant Engaged

Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (AECPL) is a group of young professionals dedicated to assignments in Pollution Control under the dynamic leadership of Mr. Rakesh Shah be it Air, Solid or Water related Pollution Control.

Since 1978 Anand Environmental Consultants Pvt. Ltd. (earlier known as Anand Consultants) has been working as Environmental Engineers in India as well as Bangladesh. During the said 40 years AECPL have worked for different type of industries providing various services related to consultancy, laboratory, field studies, project execution as well as operation and maintenance. Turnkey assignments are undertaken by a sister concern.

AECPL happen to be Environmental Auditors appointed by the Gujarat Pollution Control Board as per the directives of the Honorable High Court of Gujarat.

AECPL has been accredited by QCI/ NABET. Environmental testing laboratory of AECPL has also been accredited by NABL, (Annexure- 12.1 and Annexure- 12.2) .

AECPL have the necessary manpower and expertise in various fields as also the required infrastructure facilities to carry out work related to environmental engineering.

Contact information:

16, Everest Tower, Nr. Ankur Society, Naranpura, Ahmedabad-13, Gujarat. Ph./Fax:079-27484871 E-mail: [email protected], Web.: www.pollutioncontrol.co.in

Name Designation Area of Expertise

Degree / Qualification Years of Experience

EIA Coordinators (EC) Mr. Rakesh C. Shah (Director)

Environmental Engineer

AP, WP, RH, SHW

M.S. (U.S.A.) B.Tech. (IIT)

40

Ms.Dipal Shah Environmental Scientist

AP, SHW AQ

M.Sc. (Env. Science) B.Sc. (Microbiology)

10

Ms. Amita K. Rathod Environmental Scientist

WP, AP, SHW, SC

M.Sc (Chemistry), B.Sc (Chemistry)

12

Functional Area Experts (FAE) Mr. Deepak Chanchad

Empanelled Expert

RH B.Sc. , M.Sc. Chemistry PDIS (Industrial Safety)

32

Dr. Manoj Eledath Empanelled Expert

EB Ph.D. M.Sc. (Bioscience) 26

Mr. Rajendra T. Gohil Empanelled Expert

NV B. E. (Env. Engineering) 10

Ms. Preeti Mistri Environmental Scientist

AP,EB M.Sc. (Env. Science) B.Sc. (Env. Science)

4

Mr. Mayur Kumar B. Solanki

Socio-Economist SE MSW (Master of Social Work) B.A. (English)

4

Functional Area Associates (FAA)

Mr. Siddharth Environmental Engineer

NV, SHW M.Tech. (Env. Engineering) B.Tech. (Civil Engineering)

1

mailto:[email protected]�

http://www.pollutioncontrol.co.in/�


Disclosure of Consultant Engaged


Name Designation Area of Expertise

Degree / Qualification Years of Experience

Ms. Rachana Panchal Environmental Scientist

WP, EB M.Sc (Env. Science) B.Sc. (Chemistry)

2.2

Technical Support Team Members Mr. M. M. Khatri Environmental

Scientist AP ,WP M.Sc. (Organic Chemistry)

B.Sc. (Chemistry) 26

Mr. Mukund kumar Environmental Engineer

-- M.E. (Env. Engineering) B.E. (Civil. Engineering)

3

Mr. Chintan R. Shah

Civil Engineer --

M.S. (Civil Engineering) B.E. (Civil Engineering)

2

Ms. Falguni Mistry Environmental Engineer

-- M.E. (Env. Engineering) B.E. (Env. Engineering)

1.5

Ms. Aparna Navalakha Environmental Engineer


1

Ms. Niyati Raval Environmental Engineer


1

Mr. Kartik Bhatt Environmental Engineer

-- B.E. (Env. Engineering) 1

Mr. Digvijay Solanki Environmental Engineer


1

Mr. Vishal Jadhav Environmental Chemist

-- B.Sc. (Env. Science) 1

Mr.Mahesh Chovatiya Environmental Chemist

-- M.Sc. (Env. Science) B.Sc. (Env. Science)

3 months

NOTE: AP - Air pollution monitoring, prevention and control WP - Water pollution monitoring, prevention and control SHW - Solid and hazardous waste management SE - Socio – economics EB - Ecology and biodiversity HG - Hydrology, ground water and water conservation GEO - Geology SC - Soil conservation AQ - Meteorology, air quality modeling and prediction NV - Noise vibration LU - Land use RH - Risk assessment and hazard management

M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP

Documents

Transcript of M/s. Meghmani Dyes and Intermediates LLP